Professional Documents
Culture Documents
net/publication/318420929
CITATION READS
1 1,655
12 authors, including:
Some of the authors of this publication are also working on these related projects:
International Conference on Innovation in Psychology, Education and Didactics (ICIPED) View project
All content following this page was uploaded by Lefkios Neophytou on 10 September 2018.
Foreword:
Differentiation of Instruction for the Professional Development of
Teachers and students’ Success (DiDeSu).
Not just an EU funded project….a partnership, a community and an ethos.
Contemporary classrooms are comprised of diverse student population. The coexis-
tence of students of different aptitudes, socio economic origin, culture and ethnicity in
each and every classroom, makes teachers’ work much more complex and challenging.
Teachers, being at the cutting edge of an educational endeavour, are expected to differ-
entiate their instruction in order to fulfil the needs of all students in mixed ability class-
rooms. Nevertheless, in many cases, teachers have not been properly prepared for such a
demanding task.
Acknowledging these demanding realities, as well as the burden placed upon teachers,
the DiDeSu project was developed, in an effort to create the tools and methods to be em-
ployed for effective teacher training and support programs, with a clear focus on helping
teachers, effectively and sustainably, apply differentiated instruction and thus respond to
the needs of all students in mixed ability classrooms.
By engaging teacher training institutions from four European countries (Cyprus, Roma-
nia, Slovenia and Spain) while training, supporting and mobilizing many teachers from el-
ementary schools in all the aforementioned countries, DiDeSu has succeeded in developing
the incubators of differentiated instruction: schools and teachers that learned how to de-
sign, deliver and evaluate differentiated instruction. Teachers and school communities that
believed in and embraced differentiation, are now identified as its ambassadors and show-
cases thus providing examples of effective teaching practices to others.
The project took place within the period from September 2015 to September 2017 and
was coordinated by the Pedagogical Institute of Cyprus. Furthermore, the consortium of the
project consisted of the “Vasile Alecsandri” University of Bacau Romania, the Universitario
de Cartuja, Granada, Spain and the Educational Research Institute of Slovenia.
DiDeSu established an ethos of collaboration within every individual participating
school, by enabling teachers to rely on their own knowledge and expertise, apply peer
coaching practices, jointly design lessons, develop instructional material, observe lessons
of their colleagues, evaluate, reflect and improve their practices. An ethos facilitated by
the implementation of some “scaffolding” processes in the provision of support to teach-
ers: Exterior expert support aimed at developing in-house expertise. As teachers became
more familiar with the skills needed to implement differentiated instruction, exterior sup-
port was gradually reduced, thus allowing teachers to become the instructional leaders of
their peers. Thus, the project aimed to develop “learning communities of practice” that
would not only rely on exterior experts, but would utilize their own human resources to
provide the ongoing training and support needed by their faculty. The scaffolding ap-
proaches not only empowered teachers but also provided an effective solution for han-
dling the scarcity of resources in teacher training. The ratio expert/teacher was reduced,
since teachers themselves became experts and through their own professional develop-
ment were able to foster the professional development of their peers.
By utilizing contemporary ICT tools, like web-pages, social networks (Facebook) discus-
sion forums and web based learning platforms, DiDeSu enhanced the development of ICT
1
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:36 2
literacy to teachers, thus enabling them to communicate with their colleagues, exchange
ideas and share instructional material. DiDeSu e-class1 on differentiation of instruction, is
a web based learning platform that was developed within the framework of the project,
that became a useful resource which enabled participants to learn/ exchange ideas/ upload
lesson plans and discuss with their peers and their trainers (at a local and a European level)
through blogs/forums. The e-class and its resources are widely available, not only to the
participants of the project but to anyone who is interested in differentiation.
The prime target group of the project was primary school teachers. For this purpose,
two series of workshops on Differentiation of Instruction, along with two series of work-
shops on Lesson Observation and Evaluation, were developed and delivered in all partici-
pating countries. Through these workshops, a number of teachers were able to familiarize
themselves with the content, skills and techniques needed for the effective implementa-
tion of differentiated instruction and enhance their lesson observation skills. Each series of
workshops, on each topic, had a 15-hour duration and were distributed in 5 three-hour
meetings. Participants covered a wide range of topics and disciplines (e.g. maths, language,
geography, history) and engaged in hands on activities that enabled them to design, im-
plement and evaluate lessons. By utilizing a blended approach, the workshops addressed
both theory and practice. Thus, there was sufficient time between the various consequent
meetings that allowed participants to apply in their schools the knowledge and skills they
had acquired and then reflect and discuss them with the rest of the participants in the
workshop. The second series of seminars took place after the evaluation of the first series,
thus enabling teacher trainers to optimize the content and methods of the seminars. All
material used in the workshops was uploaded on the e-class, therefore becoming avail-
able to all teachers who want to use it.
Two training events took place for the preparation of these workshops. The first train-
ing event took place in Ljubljana, Slovenia, in December 2015 and the second in Granada,
Spain, in September 2016. During these training events, teacher trainers from the consor-
tium of the project jointly developed the material that was going to be used in the work-
shops.. The jointly developed material was produced in English and afterwards translated
in the language of the participants, ready to be used during the workshops.
Two international conferences took place within the framework of DiDeSu, one in Ro-
mania and one in Cyprus: the “1st International Conference on Innovations in Psychology,
Education and Didactics” (ICIPED2 in Romania ) and the “International Conference on Dif-
ferentiation of instruction for the professional Development of teachers and students’ Suc-
cess in Cyprus” (DiDeSu).3 These conferences brought together experts, academics and
practitioners from a wide range of disciplines across the globe, to discuss the various op-
tions and strategies for the effective implementation of differentiation of instruction in
contemporary classrooms. Thus, links were created between the scientific research and
1. http://didesu.cy.net/
2. The ICIPED, took place from 10th - 11th March 2017 in Bacau, Romania and was realized via the collab-
oration between the Journal of Innovation in Psychology, Education and Didactics, Vasile Alecsandri University
of Bacău, and Psychreg. http://www.iciped.psychreg.org/
3 The International Conference on Differentiation of instruction for the professional Development of teach-
ers and students’ Success (DiDeSu) took place in Nicosia on the 26 - 27 May 2017 http://didesu.cy.net/
2
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:36 3
practice, while various strategies and approaches to differentiation were discussed. In this
sense, the conferences provided suggestions and useful insights that could help not only
in the implementation of differentiation, but also in the professional development of teach-
ers by providing learning and support towards the sustainable inclusion of differentiation
in their everyday practices.
This book gathers and presents some of the best practices that have emerged during the
two year period of the project and reflects the hard work that was carried out by all part-
ners, towards the realization of its objectives. It includes case studies, good practices and
methodological guidelines that derived from the implementation of the project. We sin-
cerely hope that teachers will find it useful and resourceful in their everyday struggle to re-
spond to the needs of all students in contemporary mixed ability classrooms.
3
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:36 4
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:36 5
English
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:36 6
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 7
7
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 8
strategies that alter the content (how information is presented), the process (how students
interact with the material presented), and the product (how students demonstrate their un-
derstanding and learning) based on diverse learning needs in terms of background knowl-
edge, readiness, learning profile, and preferred learning style (Diagram 1).
ŝĨĨĞƌĞŶƚŝĂƚĞĚƚĞĂĐŚŝŶŐƐƚƌĂƚĞŐŝĞƐ
ůĞĂƌŶŝŶŐŶĞĞĚƐ
;ŬŶŽǁůĞĚŐĞ͕ƌĞĂĚŝŶĞƐƐ͕ůĞĂƌŶŝŶŐƉƌŽĨŝůĞ͕ƉƌĞĨĞƌƌĞĚůĞĂƌŶŝŶŐƐƚLJůĞͿ
Differentiated instruction has gained increased attention over the past decade as an inno-
vative instructional practice that can face the challenges of contemporary classrooms. Although,
differentiated instruction has been seen by several scholars from different points of view, nev-
ertheless they all agree that DI is the way to respond to the variance of students’ needs.
• An instruction that is proactively planned by the teacher to be robust enough to ad-
dress a range of learner needs, in contrast with planning a single approach for every-
one and reactively trying to adjust the plans when it becomes apparent that the lesson
is not working for some of the learners for whom it was intended (Tomlinson, 2001).
• A process approach to teaching and learning for students of differing abilities in the
same class (Hall, Strangman, & Meyer, 2002).
• An instruction that requires a more conscious effort to analyse available data and
make decisions about what is working and what needs to be adjusted (Gregory &
Chapman, 2007).
• Differentiation of teaching and learning is the today’s challenge for teachers to act
as curriculum developers in micro-level. However, teachers cannot differentiate stu-
dents’ performance if they do not employ simultaneously to differentiated instruc-
tion processes for image construction and emancipation, which could balance the
social inequalities (Koutselini & Agathagelou, 2009).
• An instruction that may be made by teachers based on what they know about stu-
dents’ learning preferences (i.e., intelligence, talents, learning styles), allowing stu-
dents’ choices in working independently, with partners, or as a team; or providing
varied work spaces that are conducive to various learning preferences (i.e., quiet
work spaces, work spaces with tables instead of desks) (Ireh & Ibeneme, 2010)
• An interesting option for use in regular classrooms as well, classrooms where learn-
ing has become student oriented and collaborative and where all students are suc-
cessfully and meaningfully challenged (Smit & Humpert, 2012).
• An instructional design model … that guarantee effective learning for varied indi-
8
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 9
9
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 10
process (Kyriakides, Cremmers, Antoniou, 2009; Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017a). Teach-
ers need to have a deep knowledge of the philosophy and pedagogical approach of differ-
entiation in order to implement it. Teachers need to change the way they think about
planning, designing and providing instruction towards a more student-centered approach;
an approach that is mainly based on the assumptions of how “my” students can work, will
respond, will learn, what will be difficult or very easy for them etc.
Nevertheless, teachers should not be scapegoated if an educational system does not
properly support them in their quest for differentiated instruction. Teachers need to be
supported in their effort to differentiate their instruction through consistent training and
support (Affholder, 2003; Smith, 2011; Valiandes & Neophtou, 2017a). To this end, tradi-
tional top-down, one shot, lecture approach seminars are unable to convince their partic-
ipants to embrace and sustain the proposed instructional changes. Successful programs
are those developed according to teachers’ needs and those that provide ongoing support
and feedback by experts or mentors for sustainable change. Furthermore, effective teacher
development is not limited only to instructional skills, but further aims to develop teach-
ers’ research and inquiry skills by empowering them to become reflective practitioners.
The emphasis is now placed in the creation of high quality professional development pro-
grams, characterized by: active learning, collective participation, a focus on content knowl-
edge and instructional methods and are closely related to the curriculum and the existing
teaching realities and have sufficient duration and continuance (Valiandes & Neophytou,
2017b). Improving school effectiveness has been correlated with improving teacher effec-
tiveness and similarly teacher effectiveness can indeed be improved by a quality teachers’
professional development and learning program.
Notably, differentiation is not the easy way out of the traditional “one size fits all” approaches,
but it can most definitely contribute towards the improvement of instructional effectiveness
and the growth of all students in mixed ability classrooms. Differentiation, as an instructive ap-
proach, aims to maximize the learning opportunities for every student. Therefore, it may be
considered as a response to the criticism of technocratic and positivist tradition, proposing, as
Tomlinson (2001) points out, a change and adoption of the teaching practices that will affect and
shape dynamically the learning process, based on the teaching routines that correspond to the
diversity of student population, found in each and every mixed ability classroom.
10
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 11
should be used by the teacher to design activities accordingly, in order to provide oppor-
tunities for all students to work and learn.
Teacher’s scientific knowledge about the discipline of one’s instruction or/and on the in-
structional/curricular topic subject, guide the setting of the lesson aim and objectives.
Identifying and setting the basic core knowledge that all students must acquire, comprises
the basic element of differentiated instruction, as it ensures that all objectives, activities
and assessment goals will be achieved. Then, the core, basic knowledge (new knowledge),
prerequisite knowledge (knowledge that is necessary to be able to acquire the basic knowl-
edge) and transformational knowledge (knowledge that extends beyond the basic and
prerequisite knowledge) must be clearly defined. Transformational knowledge mainly aims
at students who are more advanced than the main target group, as defined by the cur-
riculum. It may even refer to gifted students (Koutselini 2006, p. 87) (Diagram 2).
LESSON AIM
TRANSFORMATIONAL
KNOWLEDGE AND SKILLS
DYNAMIC CONTEXT FLEXIBLE TEACHING
OF TEACHING ADJUSTMENT
DEVELOPMENT SET LESSON OBJECTIVES
Diagram 2: Preparation for the planning of differentiated instruction. Adapted from Koutselini, M.
(2006).
11
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 12
that all students should acquire, based on the framework that the curriculum establishes.
This knowledge and skills are considered to be usefull and necessary to learners and should
therefore formulate the minimum level of knowledge, skills and attitudes that each and
every student, regardless his/her aptitude, should master by the end of the lesson. Differ-
entiated instruction is based upon this core knowledge (Koutselini, 2008; Tomlinson &
Allan, 2000; Valiandes, 2015), as it ensures that all students will be given the opportunity
to learn it. To ensure this, a teacher must prepare a lesson plan that provides students with
opportunities to gain new skills and new knowledge and also allow them to use, apply and
finally transform it so as it becomes their own personal knowledge.
Both prerequisite and basic knowledge are part of what we call fundamental knowl-
edge and should be taken into consideration when planning instruction. Prerequisite knowl-
edge/skills are identified as the knowledge/skills that a student should acquire before
constructing new knowledge, while basic knowledge/skills are the knowledge/skills that a
student should acquire after completion of the lesson.
Taking into consideration that a student has to acquire the prerequisite knowledge in order
to be able to construct new knowledge, there is a need to perform pre-assessment, so that stu-
dents have the opportunity to retrieve and refresh their prerequisite knowledge and the
teacher to be able to identify any misconceptions or weaknesses that the students may have.
Most of the times, teachers assume that any prerequisite knowledge is also pre-existing, mean-
ing that students have acquired the specific knowledge from previous lessons. This, however,
should not be taken for granted unless this knowledge and/or skills had been taught and as-
sessed shortly before and students had been identified as having acquired the specific content.
Instructional objectives that are based on core knowledge and skills, constitute the foun-
dation for differentiated instruction as they help teachers to remain focused on what they want
to achieve. At the same time, objectives guide the constant and formative assessment which is
an excellent source of information regarding the dynamic differentiation of teaching. By set-
ting the objectives, teachers know in advance what their students should learn by the end of
the lesson and what exactly they should assess (by setting high realistic expectations for all).
12
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 13
13
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 14
2.1.4. Designing the course of Differentiated instruction, students’ work and learning
Based on the above, teachers should be able to decide which teaching techniques and
strategies they could employ in order to ensure that all students will be engaged in the
learning process and will be working on a task, so as to acquire the basic fundamental
knowledge and skills. Teachers should also keep in mind that even the most sophisticated
and analytical lesson design will most likely need to change in the course of an instruction
and therefore they should be ready to modify and adjust it dynamically, according to stu-
dents’ reactions.
The first step for Differentiated instruction is to design the activities in a Hierarchical
order, beginning with those which are used to test the prerequisite knowledge and then
moving on to those that introduce the new knowledge. Furthermore, hierarchical activities
refer to classifying activities that are simpler to more complex and that are more conver-
gent to more divergent.
As shown in Diagram 3, the first two activities clearly require students to work and re-
trieve prior/ prerequisite knowledge before they are introduced to the new knowledge.
Activities at the phase of instruction mostly include open ended activities, small investiga-
tions (Koutselini, 2008), brainstorming activities or entrance slips that require a minimum
amount of time and can easily be assessed by the educator.
By placing emphasis on the prerequisite knowledge, the teacher, through systematic form-
ative assessment, provides students whose performance is below average, the opportunity
14
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 15
to work on their own pace with or without help (yet using learning braces), while at the same
time provides to the more advanced students opportunities to move on and use this knowl-
edge in more complex problems. Teachers who are quite new in the implementation of DI,
often state that this process is too time-consuming, especially in the beginning, as there is a
lot of prerequisite knowledge that has to be acquired by students. Extra time has to be spent
on either re-teaching or correcting any misunderstandings students may have. After a while,
students acquire the basic knowledge and can thus work more effectively on acquiring any
new knowledge. This denotes that, teachers should patiently design and help construct this
new knowledge rather than simply teach what it is stated within the curriculum, as the ac-
quisition of new knowledge should be fundamentally based on prior knowledge.
Furthermore, designing instruction in a hierarchical way enables the teacher to adjust dy-
namically the activities and the time students need to work on specific activities, by observ-
ing students’ work while the learning process is evolving. In practice, this means that students
have the opportunity to work according to their own working and learning pace and thus do
not have to follow the pace of the “mainstream” class. Although all students may begin the
lesson from the same activity, later on each student works at his/her own pace, while the
teacher oversees, supports and coordinates all the work done in the classroom.
Another main characteristic of differentiated instruction refers to the classification of an
activity in terms of its complexity and the sophistication of the work needed. Classification
of activities can be established in terms of the knowledge/skill students are expected to
learn. Therefore, all students should be able to implement their analysis and composition
skills, yet some will do that on a simpler level and others on a more advanced (Neophytou
& Valiandes, 2015; Valiandes, 2013). When we refer to the classification of activities, we ba-
sically refer to the ‘Horizontal Differentiation’ that allows all students to work on the ac-
quisition of the same knowledge/skill through activities that are classified or leveled based
on their difficulty, composition and complexity. Most of the times, these classified activi-
ties comprise of the same activity that is either more simplified and less demanding for
weaker students or more challenging and complex for more advanced students. These ac-
tivities are also referred to as tiered activities.
It should be made clear that no student should be excluded from accessing the more
complex activities. On the contrary, based on the continuous observation and evaluation
of students’ work, teachers must dynamically adjust the activities so as to be in accordance
with the students’ readiness levels at any given time. As a student’s performance improves,
he/she can receive more challenging assignments, whereas if a student who was believed
to be more advanced appears to be behind in terms of certain basic skills, the teacher
should be ready to help him/her by assigning the proper, even simpler learning tasks (Neo-
phytou & Valiandes, 2015). Differentiation is therefore a dynamic process that is based on
flexible planning (Orlich, Harder, Callahan, Trevisan, & Brown, 2012; Tomlinson, 2001).
Activities that ensure students’ better understanding and help them practice what they
have been taught, or even transform their knowledge at a whole new level, should be in-
cluded in the planning of teaching. These activities should be introduced during teaching
in the form of anchoring activities. The purpose of these activities is to maximize students’
participation in the activities which have a true learning value and meaning.
Moreover, the teacher provides the means and the material that students will need, as
well as manages which student will have access to which material or mean, so as not to lose
15
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 16
any valuable teaching time or disrupt the flow of the lesson. Students need to become fa-
miliar with work routines and use the material that is available in the classroom. It is es-
sential for students to establish the work routine individually, with their peers or in groups,
as well as with the whole classroom (Diagram 3). Also, students should be able to use the
various means that are available to support their learning style. Some of these essential
routines are: writing in notebooks, using computer software, select and use the appropri-
ate learning support, functional use of teaching aids, maths equipment etc.
Learning support has an important role in the implementation of differentiation. Learn-
ing braces can help students retrieve the essential prerequisite and fundamental knowledge
as well as help them acquire new knowledge. It is important for the teacher to be aware
when students might need additional support. The teacher may not be able to assist them
at the given time, but they could use the learning braces (which could take up different forms
e.g. bookmarks, visual aids, notebooks etc) that will enable students to work on their own,
without constantly needing the teacher’s help. The teacher, therefore, has more time to help
and support those who actually need help, thus maximizing the time for individualized teach-
ing and learning (Neophytou & Valiandes, 2015; Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017b).
Differentiation cannot be seen in the absence of assessment. Assessment is vital and es-
sential for the planning, reflection and redesign of differentiated instruction. Consequently,
further from pre-assessment, it is important to plan and design both formative assessment and
final assessment. Through formative assessment the teacher gains information regarding the
students’ level of work, difficulties they may encounter, any misconceptions they might have
and an overall idea on their progress, that allows teachers to dynamically adapt instruction.
Planning for differentiation of instruction can be concluded with the provision of final as-
sessment, not as a way to test and compare students between their peers, but as a way to
assess the level of knowledge and skills students have mastered. Final assessment may be in
the form of exit slips, which constitute a quick and informal assessment technique. Informa-
tion gathered by final assessment will support teachers’ reflection regarding their instruc-
tion and simultaneously provide the basis for designing the next differentiated instruction.
16
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 17
17
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 18
room, this refers to the provision that each and every student can work in his/her own
pace without being dragged up or pushed down, just to fit in an inflexible predefined
timetable and framework of activities. As students work and learn on their own pace,
teachers must design and implement the lesson plans that provide opportunities for indi-
vidual work that fosters the development of a personal comfort zone for learning. Accord-
ing to a hierarchically structured lesson plan, students can work individually and move on
to the next activity in an asynchronous manner, thus differentiating from their classmates.
By establishing asynchronous work, low achievers and slow learners have more time to
work and acquire the basic knowledge and skills, whereas high achievers and quick learn-
ers can move on, develop and enhance their learning and skills further more. In this way
all students’ needs are met and students feel happy working on activities that are mean-
ingful and challenging. It is safe to say that differentiated instruction enables students to
work individually in an asynchronous manner and learn on their own pace as part of their
basic working routine. This individual work is then followed by cooperative work and the
participation of the whole classroom.
STUDENT TEACHER
1. Students work
Individually x Individualized help and
support
x Learning braces
x Communication and
3. Students work with support with students
2. Students work x MonitŽƌŝŶŐƐƚƵĚĞŶƚƐ͛
the whole class
together and collaborate work
x Evaluation of task
completion and the
fulfillment of objectives
18
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 19
Phases of implementation
• Develop the on-level task, according to the standards expected by the curriculum.
• Adjust the task to create a below-level task for struggling students.
• Adjust the task to create an above- level task for advanced students.
Classroom techniques
For Struggling Students
• Level: Provide more accessible readings/materials (level, vocabulary, form, etc.) on
the same topic; use recorded readings.
• Structure: Provide highlighted texts; utilize graphic organizers to direct reading and
problem solving.
• Complexity: Simplify the complexity of an assignment by providing aids (guidelines,
learning braces, etc.) that will guide them through the various steps that are neces-
sary to reach the minimum goal set for all students in the class.
For advanced students
• Level: Provide more expert-like readings/materials (level, vocabulary, form, etc.) on
same topic.
• Pace: Ask students to examine the view of the author/innovator-information or a
similar piece/problem and to look for connections/patterns.
• Creativity: Provide more open-ended assignments—give students room to experi-
ment with various options about reaching a well specified goal (same goal as the
rest of the class).
• Complexity: Increase the complexity level of an assignment.
Examples and ideas for activities and possible products regarding the 3 tiers are pre-
sented in Table 1.
19
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:37 20
20
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 21
Tier 3. A. Solve the problem in two different ways. Anna has 32 books that she
(High) must place in equal numbers on her 4 bookshleves.
How many books must she place on each shelf?
B. Now write you own problem that can be solved in the same way.
C. Write down your thoughts regarding the relation between multiplication
and division as you have witnest it in the above problems.
21
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 22
Assessment Students will be able Students will be able Students will be able to
to write a five- to state a point of view write a five-paragraph
sentence paragraph and successfully essay that states a point
that successfully defend their ideas by of view, defends the point
states and supports using two paragraphs of view, and uses resources
a main idea. The that defend their to support the point of
paragraph will meet point of view, main view. The essay will meet
the criteria on the ideas and supporting the criteria on the state
state writing rubric. material. The writing rubric.
paragraphs will meet
the criteria on the
state writing rubric.
Phases of implementation
1. Create Activities: To begin, you must first create some specific activities or a set of
activities that coincide with the targeted content area and which can be used in par-
ticular phases of the lesson. Activities may vary for different skill levels, as well as in-
terests.
2. Introduce Activities: Once these activities have been created, introduce the idea of
anchor activities to students. Describe your expectations, the tasks and the time stu-
dents will have to work on the activities.
3. Assessment: Assessment of the activities can be done both during class and through
student-teacher conferences, rubrics, and student contracts.
Classroom techniques
• Used in any subject
• Individual assignments or small groups
22
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 23
Phases of implementation
1. Ask yourself, “What is the best group formation to meet the learning outcome for
this activity?” Consider a teacher-led group (whole-class, small group, or an individ-
ual teacher-directed activity), or a student-led group (collaborative, performance-
based, or pairs).
2. Evaluate all assessment data and look over student-leaning profiles to help you form
groups.
23
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 24
3. Identify the most effective group formation. For example, group students based on
their gender, previous group, student’s selection, or teacher’s selection.
4. Identify the most effective grouping formation. For example, group students by gen-
der, previous group, student selection, or teacher selection.
Classroom techniques
• Create a color-coded system or chart to help you (and students) know which group(s)
they are in.
• Give specific instructions about the tasks groups must perform.
• Write on the classroom board some specific instructions and expectations so that
you don’t have to repeat yourself.
• Model and practice routines and procedures for getting into and out of groups. De-
velop a routine so as not to leave your classroom in “utter chaos” after a group task
is completed.
• Set a specific time limit for students to complete their group work. It’s best to set an
alarm so students know when the alarm goes off, they must proceed to the next ac-
tivity quietly.
• Implement a student learning log for each group they are in. A color-coded one
works best for students to keep track and record what they completed in each group.
24
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 25
will be used to provide advanced level learning experiences in each area of the
regular curriculum.
Classroom techniques
• Peer tutoring (as an alternative the student may tutor other students in the class-
room)
• Cooperative learning
• Autonomous working (alone or with a partner), researching and proposing solutions
to a problem related to the content being studied (participation in activities that
serve the community).
• Provide students with assessment guidelines (rubric) to enable them to grade their
learning progress throughout a given unit.
Entrance slips help students reflect on what they know by working and recalling the pre-
requisite knowledge needed to work and help them acquire the new knowledge. Entrance
slips are very useful to identify any students’ misconceptions or difficulties they might have
in terms of the prerequisite knowledge. This information will allow the teacher to adapt one’s
instruction in order to necessary correct any misconceptions and provide students with op-
portunities to work and learn the prerequisite knowledge. Of course this is not always the case
25
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 26
since not all students are able to acquire this knowledge within such a small time span. In this
case, the learning braces must be used to help students work and learn.
Create and use of entrance slips
• After determining the prerequisite knowledge, think of activities that will help stu-
dent recall this knowledge.
• Create an entrance slip that you can present to students orally, illustrate it visually,
or present it in printed form.
• Soon after students quiet down introduce the lesson by handing out the entrance slip
that they should all work on for 2-4 minutes.
• Students may write their responses in their notebook, on a post-it note, on a blank
piece of paper or on a handout provided by the teacher.
• Students who complete their work on the entrance slip can check their work with the
students sitting next to them or their group.
• The teacher reviews student’s work and gathers information regarding their level of
knowledge and understanding on the specific topic.
• Entrance slips are not usually collected by the teacher but one might do so in cases
that the teacher wants to study them in order to get more information about stu-
dents’ individual work.
Example 1: Elementary History lesson entrance slip (Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017b)
Lesson aim: Students should be able to identify and talk about the differences between
the Paleolithic and Neolithic eras.
Prerequisite knowledge: Students should be able to identify and talk about the main char-
acteristic of the Paleolithic era. The teacher will ask students to work on the entrance slip
to evaluate their knowledge on this particular subject area.
Entrance slip
Choose and work on one of the following activities
1. Write down a few words (or sentences) that come in mind when yoy hear the phrase
Paleolithic Era?
2. Draw a picture about the Paleolithic Era and prepare to talk about it in classroom.
Example 2: Elementary maths lesson entrance slip (Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017b)
Maths lesson: Area of shapes
What do you know about the shapes below?
26
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 27
Exit Slips help students reflect on what they have learned and the degree to which they can
use this new knowledge and/ or skill. This information will guide the teacher to design the
following lesson on the topic by having in mind what has already been learned and what
has to be reviewed or revisited in order to resolve any misconceptions. Exit Slips are great
to use because they take just a few minutes to be prepared by the teacher and students
can complete them very quickly.
Generalized categories and examples of exit slips (Fisher & Frey, 2004):
• Prompts that document learning,
Write one thing you have learned today.
Discuss how today’s lesson could be used in the real world.
• Prompts that emphasize the process of learning,
I didn’t understand…
Write one question you have about today’s lesson.
• Prompts to evaluate the effectiveness of instruction
Did you enjoy working in small groups today?
Write sentences to compare the vehicles you can see in the pictures.
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Name _________________________________________ Class____________
27
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 28
:ULWHGRZQ«
3 things you have learned today and how you will use them
3 __________________________________________________________________
2 ___________________________________________________________________
1 ___________________________________________________________________
1 ___________________________________________________________________
28
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 29
students to write creatively, to consider a topic from a different perspective and to prac-
tice writing for different audiences. It includes writing from different viewpoints. It helps
students learn important writing skills such as writing for a specific audience, expressing the
main idea, and organization. It teaches students to think creatively about writing by re-
sponding to the following questions:
Role of the Writer: Who are you as a writer? (a president, a toy, a particular character)
What is your role in the story? How would this role affect your writing?
Audience: To whom are you writing? (a schoolmate, a teacher, readers of a newspaper)
What is the appropriate language to use when addressing this particular audience?
Format: What is the format of your writing? (a letter, a poem, a speech)
Topic and strong verb: What are you writing about? Why? What’s the subject or the main point?
Phases of implementation
1. Identify the learning goals of the lesson/unit.
2. Use the assessment data and students’ profiles to determine students’ readiness
levels, learning styles, or interests.
3. Design different writing tasks by determining the role of the writer, the audience, the
format and the topic of the text.
4. Arrange the tasks on a RAFT choice board.
5. Check the following:
- Does the RAFT appeal to different learning styles?
- Is there a range of difficulty in the roles, formats, readiness levels?
- Do the roles, formats or topics appeal to a variety of students’ interests?
Classroom techniques
RAFT is a strategy that employs multiple ways for meeting the needs of all students,
based on where they are and their identified needs. Possible Ideas for a RAFT:
characters from a story, historical figures, jobs, key terms, scientists or politicians, mu-
sical instruments, diseases, geographic formations, vocabulary words, cartoon characters,
types of fabric, composers or artists, instruments or tools, shapes or colours, authors or in-
venters, business or industry person, minerals or chemical elements, cities, countries or
continents, technical terms, etc. It can also be used during a maths lesson.
Example of RAFT during a foreign language food lesson
Role Audience Format Topic
Chef Customer Menu Detailed description of all the
ingredients
Cookbook writer Cooks Recipe Instructions on food preparation
Customer Restaurant Complain Problem with food or poor
owner service
Student visiting Parents Letter Describing a typical meal you eat in
a foreign county the foreign country you are visiting
Travel writer Reader wanting Recommen- Good things to eat while in this parti-
to travel dation cular foreign country and what to avoid
29
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 30
3.2.4. Tic-tac-toe
Tic-tac-toe, also known as Think-tac-toe, is a differentiation tool that offers a collection of
activities from which students can choose to demonstrate their understanding on a topic (Nun-
ley, 2006; Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017b). It is presented in the form of a nine-square grid sim-
ilar to a tic-tac-toe board and students may be expected to complete until they get “three in
a row”. The activities vary in terms of content, process, and product and can be tailored to ad-
dress different levels of student readiness, interests, and learning styles. The central square
may be left blanc for students to select an activity of their own. Tic-tac-toe activities may be
given to every student in the class, higher ability students as enrichment activities or below av-
erage performing students as review and practice activities. Involvement in this strategy en-
courages independent learning. Teachers should periodically monitor students and ask them
to keep a log of their progress. In cases of lengthy activities, the tic-tac-toe board may also be
used with shorter, open-ended questions posed at varying levels of Blooms Taxonomy.
Phases of implementation
1. Identify the outcomes and instructional focus of a unit of study.
2. Use the assessment data and students’ profiles to determine students’ readiness
levels, learning styles, or interests.
3. Design nine different tasks based on knowledge/skills that students should work and
be assessed on.
4. Arrange the tasks on a choice board by placing in the central square of the board the
task that all students should complete.
5. Students then choose and complete three tasks, one of which must be the task in the
middle square. The three tasks should complete a Tic-Tac-Toe row.
6. Students who complete one Tic-Tac-Toe row may carry on and try to complete more
activities and more Tic-Tac-Toes.
Classroom techniques
• Allow students to complete any three tasks—even if the completed tasks don’t com-
plete a Tic-Tac-Toe row.
• Create different choice boards based on students’ readiness level. (Struggling stu-
dents work with the options on one choice board while more advanced students
have different options.)
• Create different choice boards based on students’ learning styles or learning pref-
erences. For example, a choice board could include three kinaesthetic tasks, three
auditory tasks or three visual tasks.
• Create a choice board with more than 9 options (e.g. 16)
• Instead of having students complete a tic-tac-toe row, give them a board template
so that they design/colour a certain pattern inside the 3x3 square e. g.:
30
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 31
Place the numbers in the circles in Write the number which has: Write the number before and after
ascending order, from the smallest the given number
5 tens ʃɲɿ 3 units Æ ................
to the greatest. ........, 56, .......... ..........., 77, .........
1 ten ʃɲɿ 9 units Æ ...............
........, 18, .......... .........., 40, .........
23 56 47 29 63 18 ϰƚĞŶƐʃɲɿϱƵŶŝƚƐÆ ...............
........, 29, .......... .........., 31, .........
9 tens Æ ................
.........,50, .......... ........., 99, ..........
Write the number Find the answer Draw the beads on the abacus:
Seventeen: ....................................... ϲрϮсϮϬрϮсϰрϮс
Twenty-five: .....................................
Ninety-nine: ..................................... ϭϬрϮсϭϲрϮсϭϰрϮс
Thirty: ...............................................
ϭϮрϮсϮрϮсϭϴрϮс 37 64
Solve the problem Fill in: Pair the objects. Write the equation
A bus can carry more than 43 for each representation.
passengers and less than 56. If the
ƵŶŝƚƐ͛ ĚŝŐŝƚ ŝƐ ϳ͘ How many
1111111111
passengers can the bus carry; _____ tens and _____ units
_____ tens and _____ units
31
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 32
4.1. Maths Lesson plan based on differentiated instruction philosophy and techniques
Fourth Grade: Division - distributive property
Prerequisite Knowledge
Children should be able to:
• Apply the distributive property of multiplication.
• Perform multiplication and division as inverse operations.
Objectives:
Children will be able to:
• Perform divisions with a single digit divisor, using different strategies, materials and
representations.
• Solve problems of multiplicative structure.
• Use the division algorithm.
Transformational knowledge and skills
Children will be able to:
• Write and solve their own division and multiplication problems.
• Solve divisions in their head which include a three-digit number by a one digit num-
ber.
Evaluation
• On-going, depending on the children’s response to oral and written assignments
during the course
• Entrance slip
• Exit Slip
32
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 33
To ensure the ticket for your next mathematical journey, you must ƐƐĞƐƐƚƵĚĞŶƚƐ͛ƉƌŝŽƌ
solve the following mathematical equations. knowledge and allows
[ ««« ¸ «« them to recall what they
ǎ «« ¸ «« know.
¸ ««« ¸ ««
[ «« ¸ ««
The students are then presented and urged to explore p. 108 of their textbook.
REMEMBER!
Students are asked to explain how
they will perform the division
ϯϵϲрϯс....... Each student may use Learning braces:
either their notebook or/and dienes notebook, dienes cubes,
cubes and/or their bookmark.
bookmark
3X6=18
ϭϴрϯсϲ
Verbalization of thought
ϭϴрϲсϯ
6X16 = 6 X (10+6)
= (6X10)+(6x6) Individual /group work
= 60 + 36
group/participation of
= 96
the whole class
33
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 34
More able students are urged to explain to the rest of the group how they should Anchor activity
proceed with the problem, practice their metacognitive skills right from the allows students to work
beginning of the lesson. according to their needs
when other students are
Children who are quick to solve the problem may:
working to complete the
- Try and find other methods of solving the division
class work.
- Compare the methods they used and decide on the best one as well as
explaining why.
- Write down or explain to the group the method they have used.
Personalized support by
The teacher provides assistance to anyone who needs it. the teacher
The children work with Activity 1 on p. 109 as well as the thinking processes of Engaging students on an
^ƚĞƉŚĂŶŽƐĂŶĚ>ŽƵŬŝĂŝŶƚĞƌŵƐŽĨŚŽǁƚŚĞLJĐĂƌƌŝĞĚŽƵƚƚŚĞĚŝǀŝƐŝŽŶϯϲϯрϯсǀ individual basis
(Pay attention to the possibility of students not being able to understand that we
depending on their
should start from left-right).
abilities and working
pace.
Asynchronous work
Students work according
to their pace without
having to rigidly follow a
mainstream pace set by
the teacher.
34
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 35
More able children may proceed with the activities 2 & 3. The detailed Anchor activity allows
division algorithm is presented for the first time (p. 110). The divider students to work
ĂŶĂůLJƐŝƐŝƐƉĞƌĨŽƌŵĞĚ;ĞŐ͘ϰϴϰрϰсǀƚŚĞLJƚĂŬĞŝŶƚŽĂĐĐŽƵŶƚƚŚĂƚϰϬϬрϰс according to their needs
ϭϬϬ͕ϴϬрϰсϮϬ͕ϰрϰсϭ͕ƚŚĞƌĞĨŽƌĞϭϬϬнϮϬнϭсϭϮϭͿ͘ when other students are
working to complete the
RECIEPT class work.
¶*ODURV·FRPSDQ\ERXJKW ITEM QUANTITY TOTAL
the office equipment that Office Chair 4 ½484
you can see on the receipt. Office 3 ½693
Bookshelf 2 ½426
Drawer 5 ½505
Children calculations are carried out in their notebook and/or some laminated
calculator cards are used.
35
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 36
Students are asked to solve, horizontally, vertically and diagonally, as many lines Tic ʹ tac ʹ toe used as an
of the mathematical Tic-Tac-Toe. The only condition is to solve the center activity Exit Slip so that student
of the Tic-Tac- Toe, where the new knowledge to be acquired is placed. will work on activities
they choose to show
what they have learned
Please complete
and write the
equation.
Solve the
following
equations, using
36
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 37
37
1_ENGLISH_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:38 38
porters of their colleagues in their schools. These courses had a 15 hour duration that was dis-
tributed in 5 three hour meetings that were organized in the form of workshops where partic-
ipants were able to cover a wide range of topics and disciplines (e.g. maths, language, geography,
history) and engage in hands on activities. Further, by utilizing a blended approach, the semi-
nars addressed both theory and practice. Thus, there was sufficient time between the various
consequent meetings in which participants were able to apply, in their schools, the knowledge
and skills acquired in the seminars and then reflect and discuss all these with the rest of the par-
ticipants in the seminar.
After the completion of the seminars, the participants developed, along with their colleagues
at schools, various lesson plans and supporting teaching material. In addition to the peer sup-
port, teacher trainers continued to visit schools and provide tailored-made support in various
forms (i.e lesson observations, lesson design, feedback, theory building etc). The material pro-
duced by the teachers was both generic (general strategies and techniques for the application
of differentiation) and specific (reflecting particular lessons or units in various disciplines of each
country’s curriculum).
Selected material was uploaded on the DiDeSu e-learning platform (e-class) in order to be
used by anyone who might be interested in similar topics (including schools which were not di-
rectly engaged in the project). The DiDeSu e-class is a specially designed web based learning plat-
form, developed to host all the material produced by the teachers, along with a discussion
forum and other ICT tools enabling reflection, communication and collaboration of the partic-
ipants. All teaching material on the e-class is organized in thematic units in order to be easily ac-
cessible. In addition, there is a discussion forum that enables participants to discuss and reflect
on the posts of their colleagues.
Teachers who took part in DiDeSu argued that both the initial training and the ongoing sup-
port contributed to the effective differentiation of their instruction. Furthermore, they em-
phasized how useful the e-class proved out to be, not only in terms of their own self-regulated
learning, but also in terms of communication and support with their peers and trainers. Teach-
ers stated that DiDeSu gave them the opportunity to acquire new knowledge, but at the same
time enabled them to implement this new knowledge in their everyday teaching practices. Fur-
thermore, the participants pointed out that the observation of various lessons, gave them the
opportunity to experience differentiation in authentic classroom settings, while the observation
of their own teaching by teacher trainers and fellow teachers and the discussion that followed
helped them improve the quality of their teaching. All these are recorded in interviews given
by the participants after the completion of the projects.
To sum up, teachers who participated in a well-planned and systematic program that con-
nected theory to everyday practice were able to effectively differentiate their instruction. Dif-
ficulties and obstacles that teachers experienced were transcended through collegial
cooperation and the support from the experts. DiDeSu confirmed Valiandes and Neophytou
(2017b) main results on the characteristics that are included in effective teacher professional
development programs. These are a) the response to teachers’ need by providing a program fo-
cused on both content and pedagogical knowledge, b) the duration of the program, c) the ini-
tial training and the follow up training sessions, d) the collaboration and communication with
colleagues and experts, e) the constant, on site, support and help during the implementation
and f) the development of personal skills for the self- reflection and self-evaluation of teachers.
Considering all these, we may argue that the overall success of DiDeSu provides additional
support in the theory regarding the characteristics of effective teacher professional develop-
ment/learning programs.
38
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:32 39
Ελληνικό
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:32 40
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:32 41
41
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:32 42
Αναλυτικού Προγράμματος (Α.Π.). Σε μια προσπάθεια για δημιουργία ενός μοντέλου που
θα στήριζε την προσπάθεια των εκπαιδευτικών για εφαρμογή της διαφοροποίησης, ο Tay-
lor (2015) προτείνει ένα μοντέλο διαφοροποίησης της διδασκαλίας, αναφέροντας τον
τρόπο με τον οποίο οι υποψήφιοι εκπαιδευτικοί Μέσης Εκπαίδευσης μαθαίνουν πώς κατά
τη διδασκαλίας μπορούν να εστιάζουν στην κατάκτηση του περιεχομένου από τους μα-
θητές (στο “τι”» διδάσκω), στη διαδικασία (στο “πώς” διδάσκω) και στο προϊόν/απο-
τέλεσμα της διδασκαλίας(στις «αποδείξεις» της διδασκαλίας). Στη βάση αυτή
διακρίνονται οι τρεις βασικοί άξονες εφαρμογής της διαφοροποίησης της διδασκαλίας
(Rock et al., 2008; Telford, 2007):
• Διαφοροποίηση περιεχομένου: “Τι” διδάσκω;
• Διαφοροποίηση της διαδικασίας “Πώς” διδάσκω;
• Διαφοροποίηση προϊόντος – αποτελέσματος : “Ποια είναι τα τεκμήρια” της μά-
θησης από τη διδασκαλία.
Σύμφωνα με την Tomlinson (2000), οι εκπαιδευτικοί για να διαφοροποιήσουν τη δι-
δασκαλία τους, χρησιμοποιούν στρατηγικές, οι οποίες αλλάζουν και προσαρμόζουν το πε-
ριεχόμενο (τρόποι και μορφές παρουσίασης του περιεχόμενου ενός κειμένου), τη
μαθησιακή διαδικασία (πώς οι μαθητές εργάζονται και αλληλεπιδρούν και πώς επεξερ-
γάζονται το περιεχόμενο) και το προϊόν ή το αποτέλεσμα (που αφορά στις δραστηριότη-
τες μέσα από τις οποίες οι μαθητές δείχνουν τι έχουν μάθει), με βάση τις διαφορετικές
ανάγκες των μαθητών σε σχέση με τις προϋπάρχουσες γνώσεις, το επίπεδο ετοιμότητας,
το μαθησιακό προφίλ και τα ενδιαφέροντά τους (Διάγραμμα 1).
ɇʏʌɲʏɻɶɿʃɹʎɷɿɲʔʉʌʉʋʉʀɻʍɻʎʏɻʎɷɿɷɲʍʃɲʄʀɲʎ
ɀɲɽɻʍɿɲʃɼ ȰʋʉʏɹʄɸʍʅɲͲ
Ʌɸʌɿɸʖʊʅɸʆʉ
ɷɿɲɷɿʃɲʍʀɲ Ʌʌʉʁʊʆ
ɀɲɽɻʍɿɲʃɹʎɲʆɳɶʃɸʎ
;ɸʏʉɿʅʊʏɻʏɲ͕ʅɲɽɻʍɿɲʃɼɷɿɲɷɿʃɲʍʀɲ͕ʅɲɽɻʍɿɲʃʊʋʌʉʔʀʄͿ
Κατά την τελευταία δεκαετία, η διαφοροποίηση της διδασκαλίας έχει ελκύσει την προ-
σοχή του εκπαιδευτικού κόσμου, ως καινοτόμος διδακτική πρακτική που μπορεί να αντι-
μετωπίσει τις προκλήσεις των σύγχρονων τάξεων. Παρότι οι ορισμοί που δίνουν οι
ερευνητές για τη διαφοροποίηση της διδασκαλίας έχουν διαφορετική εστίαση, όλοι οι
ορισμοί συμφωνούν στη δυνατότητα της διαφοροποίησης να ανταποκριθεί και να αντι-
μετωπίσει τις διαφορετικές ανάγκες των μαθητών:
• Η διδασκαλία, η οποία προγραμματίζεται και σχεδιάζεται ώστε να ανταποκριθεί
42
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:32 43
στο εύρος των μαθησιακών αναγκών των μαθητών, αλλάζει και προσαρμόζεται από
τον εκπαιδευτικό, όταν αυτό απαιτείται, για να διασφαλίσει την κατάκτηση της
γνώσης από όλους τους μαθητές (Tomlinson, 2001).
• Η διαδικασία της διδασκαλίας και μάθησης των μαθητών διαφορετικών ικανοτή-
των μέσα στην ίδια σχολική τάξη (Hall, Strangman, & Meyer, 2002).
• Η διδασκαλία η οποία απαιτεί συνειδητή προσπάθεια για την ανάλυση των δεδο-
μένων και τη λήψη αποφάσεων για το τι δουλεύει και τι πρέπει να αλλάξει ή να
προσαρμοστεί (Gregory & Chapman, 2007).
• Η διαφοροποίηση της διδασκαλίας και μάθησης αποτελεί πρόκληση για τους εκ-
παιδευτικούς σήμερα, ώστε να δράσουν ως σχεδιαστές των αναλυτικών προγραμ-
μάτων στο μικροεπίπεδο. Παρόλα αυτά, οι εκπαιδευτικοί δεν μπορούν να
διαφοροποιήσουν την επίδοση των μαθητών αν δεν εφαρμόσουν παράλληλα με
τη διαφοροποίηση της διδασκαλίας διαδικασία για την οικοδόμηση της αυτοεικό-
νας και της ενσυναίσθησης, που θα εξισορροπήσει τις κοινωνικές ανισότητες (Kou-
tselini & Agathagelou, 2009).
• Μια διδασκαλία η οποία εφαρμόζεται από τους εκπαιδευτικούς με βάση τις γνώ-
σεις που έχουν για τις προτιμήσεις των μαθητών (ευφυΐα, ταλέντα, μαθησιακό προ-
φίλ), επιτρέποντας στους μαθητές να επιλέξουν πώς θα εργαστούν (ατομικά, σε
ζευγάρια ή στην ομάδα) ή προνοώντας για επιλογή χώρων εργασίας και μάθησης,
ανάλογα με τις μαθησιακές ανάγκες των μαθητών (π.χ. ήσυχο περιβάλλον εργα-
σίας, χώρος εργασίας με τραπέζια και όχι με θρανία) (Ireh & Ibeneme, 2010).
• Ενδιαφέρουσα διδακτική πρακτική που μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί τόσο σε κανο-
νική τάξη όσο και σε τάξεις όπου εφαρμόζονται μαθητοκεντρικές και συνεργατικές
διδακτικές διαδικασίες, και όπου υπάρχει για όλους τους μαθητές επιτυχημένη και
ουσιαστική πρόκληση για εργασία και μάθηση (Smit & Humpert, 2012).
• Ένα διδακτικό μοντέλo που διασφαλίζει την αποτελεσματική διδασκαλία και μά-
θηση για μαθητές με διαφορετικές ανάγκες, η οποία πραγματοποιείται μέσα από
ένα καλά σχεδιασμένο αναλυτικό πρόγραμμα και μία μαθητοκεντρική διδασκαλία
που ανταποκρίνεται στις διαφορές των μαθητών σε σχέση με την ετοιμότητά τους
(η γνώση και οι δεξιότητες των μαθητών που σχετίζονται με συγκεκριμένη ακολου-
θία μάθησης), τα ενδιαφέροντα (τα θέματα που προκαλούν την περιέργεια και το
πάθος για εργασία και μάθηση του μαθητή) και το μαθησιακό προφίλ (πώς οι μα-
θητές μαθαίνουν καλύτερα σε σχέση με το μαθησιακό τους στυλ, τον τύπο νοημο-
σύνης τους, την κουλτούρα και το φύλο) (Maeng & Bell, 2015).
• Η διδασκαλία και μάθηση που στοχεύει στην επίτευξη του ταιριάσματος ανάμεσα
στους μαθησιακούς στόχους και τις δραστηριότητες από τη μία και τις ανάγκες των
μαθητών από την άλλη, για τη μεγιστοποίηση της προόδου και ανάπτυξης των μα-
θητών (De Neve, Devos, & Tuytens, 2015).
• Στο πλαίσιο της διαφοροποίησης της διδασκαλίας, η ισότητα ικανοποιείται μέσα
από τις ευκαιρίες που όλοι οι μαθητές έχουν σε μία τάξη μικτής ικανότητας για την
επίτευξη των στόχων του αναλυτικού προγράμματος στον μέγιστο βαθμό, με βάση
τις δικές τους προσωπικές δεξιότητες και ικανότητες, διασφαλίζοντας τη δυνατό-
τητα πρόσβασης όλων στην κατάκτηση της γνώσης (Valiandes, 2015).
Θα πρέπει να επισημανθεί ότι η εφαρμογή της διαφοροποίησης της διδασκαλίας δεν
43
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:32 44
44
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 45
λοσοφία και την παιδαγωγική προσέγγιση της διαφοροποίησης, για να μπορέσουν να την
εφαρμόσουν. Απαιτείται, συνεπώς, αλλαγή στον τρόπο σκέψης, οργάνωσης, σχεδιασμού
και εφαρμογής της διδασκαλίας προς πιο μαθητοκεντρικές μορφές διδασκαλίας. Πρόκει-
ται για μία διδακτική προσέγγιση που ουσιαστικά στηρίζεται στη γνώση που έχω ως εκ-
παιδευτικός για το πώς οι μαθητές μου μπορούν να εργαστούν, να ανταποκριθούν, να
μάθουν και το τι θα είναι δύσκολο ή εύκολο για αυτούς, καθώς και το τι μπορώ να κάνω
για όλα αυτά.
Η προσπάθεια των εκπαιδευτικών για διαφοροποίηση της διδασκαλίας δεν είναι εύ-
κολη και δεν θα πρέπει να υπονομεύεται από την έλλειψη υποστήριξης από το επίσημο
εκπαιδευτικό σύστημα. Οι εκπαιδευτικοί θα πρέπει να υποστηρίζονται στην προσπάθειά
τους για διαφοροποίηση, από συνεχή και ουσιαστική επιμόρφωση και στήριξη από ειδι-
κούς (Affholder, 2003; Smith, 2011; Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017a). Για την επιμόρφωση
και στήριξη των εκπαιδευτικών σε θέματα διαφοροποίησης της διδασκαλίας, μονοήμερες
επιμορφώσεις από ειδικούς που ουσιαστικά αποτελούν διαλέξεις, κυρίως, ενημερωτικού
χαρακτήρα δεν μπορούν να τους πείσουν ώστε να αγκαλιάσουν, να πιστέψουν και να ερ-
γαστούν για την εφαρμογή οποιωνδήποτε διδακτικών πρακτικών. Επιτυχημένα προ-
γράμματα επιμόρφωσης και μάθησης των εκπαιδευτικών θεωρούνται αυτά που
αναπτύσσονται στη βάση των αναγκών των εκπαιδευτικών και προσφέρουν, πέρα από
μια σειρά σεμιναρίων, συνεχή υποστήριξη και ανατροφοδότηση από ειδικούς ή μέντο-
ρες, ώστε να οδηγήσουν σε αλλαγή στις διδακτικές πρακτικές, που θα είναι ουσιαστική και
μόνιμη. Θα πρέπει να επισημανθεί ότι η αποτελεσματική ανάπτυξη των εκπαιδευτικών
δεν περιορίζεται στην ανάπτυξη συγκεκριμένων διδακτικών πρακτικών, αλλά στοχεύει
στην ανάπτυξη ερευνητικών δεξιοτήτων, οι οποίες μπορούν να υποστηρίξουν τη συνεχή
ανάπτυξή τους μέσα από αναστοχαστικές πρακτικές. Η έμφαση τώρα βρίσκεται στη δη-
μιουργία υψηλής ποιότητας προγραμμάτων επαγγελματικής μάθησης των εκπαιδευτι-
κών, τα οποία χαρακτηρίζονται από: δυνατότητες ενεργητικής μάθησης, τη συλλογική
συμμετοχή, την εστίαση στο περιεχόμενο της γνώσης και των διδακτικών μεθόδων, τη
στενή σύνδεση με το ΑΠ και τις υπάρχουσες διδακτικές πραγματικότητες, καθώς και με την
ικανοποιητική διάρκεια και συνέχεια (Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017a) της σχολικής απο-
τελεσματικότητας έχει συνδεθεί με τη βελτίωση της αποτελεσματικότητας των εκπαιδευ-
τικών και, παρομοίως, η αποτελεσματικότητα των εκπαιδευτικών μπορεί να συνδεθεί με
τη βελτίωση της ποιότητας των προγραμμάτων επαγγελματικής ανάπτυξης και μάθησης
των εκπαιδευτικών.
Τέλος, δεν μπορεί κανείς να ισχυριστεί ότι η διαφοροποίηση είναι ο εύκολος τρόπος
απομάκρυνσης από την παραδοσιακή διδασκαλία, η οποία στηρίζεται στη φιλοσοφία της
«μίας διδασκαλίας για όλους». Παρόλα αυτά μπορεί με βεβαιότητα να συμβάλει στη βελ-
τίωση της αποτελεσματικότητας της διδασκαλίας και στην πρόοδο όλων μαθητών στις τά-
ξεις μικτής ικανότητας. Η διαφοροποίηση, ως μια διδακτική πρακτική, στοχεύει στη
μεγιστοποίηση των μαθησιακών ευκαιριών για τον κάθε μαθητή. Συνεπώς, μπορεί να θε-
ωρηθεί ως απάντηση στην κριτική της τεχνοκρατικής και θετικιστικής παράδοσης, προ-
τείνοντας, όπως υποστηρίζει η Tomlinson (2001), την αλλαγή και την προσαρμογή των
διδακτικών πρακτικών οι οποίες θα επηρεάσουν και θα δημιουργήσουν το πλαίσιο μίας
δυναμικής μαθησιακής διαδικασίας, στηριγμένης σε διδακτικές ρουτίνες που ανταποκρί-
νονται στη διαφορετικότητα του μαθητικού πληθυσμού μίας τάξης μικτής ικανότητας.
45
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 46
46
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 47
ɇȾɃɅɃɇɈȸɇȴȻȴȰɇȾȰȿȻȰɇ
ɅɉɆȸɁȻȾȵɇȳɁɏɇȵȻɇȾȰȻȴȵɂȻɃɈȸɈȵɇ
Ʌʌʉɲʋɲɿʏʉʑʅɸʆɸʎ Ȳɲʍɿʃɹʎȳʆʙʍɸɿʎʃɲɿ
ȳʆʙʍɸɿʎ͕ȴɸʇɿʊʏɻʏɸʎ ȴɸʇɿʊʏɻʏɸʎ- Ɂɹɸʎȳʆʙʍɸɿʎ
ʃɲɿɇʏɳʍɸɿʎ ȴɸʇɿʊʏɻʏɸʎʃɲɿɇʏɳʍɸɿʎ
ȵɉȵȿȻȾɈȸ
ȴɉɁȰɀȻȾɃɅȿȰȻɇȻɃ ɀȵɈȰɇɍȸɀȰɈȻɇɈȻȾȵɇ
ɅɆɃɇȰɆɀɃȳȸ
ȰɁȰɅɈɉɂȸɇɈȸɇ ȳɁɏɇȵȻɇȾȰȻȴȵɂȻɃɈȸɈȵɇ
ɈȸɇȴȻȴȰɇȾȰȿȻȰɇ
ȴȻȴȰɇȾȰȿȻȰɇ
ȾȰȺɃɆȻɇɀɃɇɈɏɁɇɈɃɍɏɁɈȸɇȴȻȴȰɇȾȰȿȻȰɇ
ȾȰȺɃɆȻɇɀɃɇɀȵȺɃȴɃȿɃȳȻȰɇʹ
ȴɆȰɇɈȸɆȻɃɈȸɈɏɁȾȰȻɃɆȳȰɁɏɇȸɇɈȸɇɈȰɂȸɇ
47
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 48
σικές. Προαπαιτούμενες γνώσεις και δεξιότητες είναι αυτές που οπωσδήποτε ο μαθητής
πρέπει να κατέχει, για να οικοδομήσει τη νέα γνώση, ενώ βασικές είναι οι νέες γνώσεις και
δεξιότητες που θα αποκτήσει ο μαθητής μέσα από τη συγκεκριμένη διδασκαλία. Στον προ-
γραμματισμό της διδασκαλίας λαμβάνεται πρόνοια και καθορίζονται επακριβώς τόσο οι
προαπαιτούμενες όσο και οι βασικές γνώσεις και δεξιότητες.
Αν θεωρήσουμε ότι για να μπορέσει ο μαθητής να οικοδομήσει τη νέα γνώση θα πρέ-
πει να κατέχει την προαπαιτούμενη, σημαντικό ρόλο στον σχεδιασμό της διδασκαλίας
διαδραματίζει η αξιολόγηση, η επαναφορά αλλά και η διόρθωση ενδεχόμενων παρα-
νοήσεων που αφορούν στην προαπαιτούμενη γνώση. Πολλές είναι οι φορές που οι εκ-
παιδευτικοί θεωρούν ότι οι προαπαιτούμενες είναι ταυτόχρονα και προϋπάρχουσες, ότι
δηλαδή οι μαθητές κατέχουν τις συγκεκριμένες γνώσεις από προηγούμενες διδασκαλίες.
Κάτι τέτοιο δεν μπορεί να θεωρηθεί de facto, εκτός και αν η διδασκαλία αυτή προηγή-
θηκε και αξιολογήθηκε μόλις το προηγούμενο μάθημα, με τρόπο που πραγματικά να δια-
σφαλίζει το επίπεδο κατάκτησης της συγκεκριμένης γνώσης από τους μαθητές.
Οι βασικές πυρηνικές γνώσεις και δεξιότητες είναι αυτές που θα οδηγήσουν στον
ακριβή καθορισμό των στόχων του μαθήματος, οι οποίοι θα πρέπει να πηγάζουν και να
συμφωνούν με τον σκοπό του μαθήματος. Η συμφωνία σκοπού και στόχων καθοδηγεί
αλλά και προστατεύει τον εκπαιδευτικό από τον κίνδυνο καθορισμού πλειάδας στόχων
που δεν εξυπηρετούν τον σκοπό και δεν μπορούν να επιτευχθούν.
48
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 49
νατότητες του κάθε μαθητή. Όταν σχεδιάζονται οι δραστηριότητες που προωθούν τον με-
τασχηματισμό των γνώσεων και δεξιοτήτων, ο εκπαιδευτικός θα πρέπει να έχει κατά νου
ότι αυτές είναι εργασίες πέρα από αυτό που θα πρέπει να μάθει ο μαθητής, δεν θα πρέ-
πει να έχουν χαρακτήρα διαδικαστικό ή διεκπεραιωτικό. Προτείνεται, τέτοιες εργασίες, να
έχουν δημιουργικό, παιγνιώδη χαρακτήρα και να αφορούν στην επίλυση προβλημάτων
που να έχουν νόημα για τους μαθητές. Η εναλλαγή και η ποικιλία των δραστηριοτήτων
αυτών τόσο ως προς τη μορφή και το είδος τους όσο και ως προς τα μέσα και τον τρόπο
εργασίας αποτελούν σημαντικούς παράγοντες για τη διατήρηση του ενδιαφέροντος των
μαθητών, την ενεργοποίηση και μάθησή τους.
Πιο κάτω παρατίθενται 2 παραδείγματα αρχικού σχεδιασμού διδασκαλίας, όπου φαί-
νεται ο καθορισμός του σκοπού, των προαπαιτούμενων, βασικών και μετασχηματιστικών
γνώσεων και δεξιοτήτων (Βαλιαντή, 2013).
49
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 50
Με βάση τον σκοπό και τις πυρηνικές γνώσεις και δεξιότητες και λαμβάνοντας υπόψη
το μαθησιακό προφίλ των μαθητών, ο εκπαιδευτικός μπορεί να αποφασίσει ποιες τεχνι-
κές, ποιες στρατηγικές διδασκαλίας, ποια μέσα και ποιες δραστηριότητες θα χρησιμο-
ποιήσει, ώστε όλοι οι μαθητές να έχουν τη δυνατότητα να εργαστούν και να κατακτήσουν
τις βασικές πυρηνικές γνώσεις και δεξιότητες. Θα πρέπει, όμως, ακόμα και κατά τη διαδι-
κασία σχεδιασμού, ο εκπαιδευτικός να έχει υπόψη του ότι η πορεία της διδασκαλίας, αν
και προγραμματίζεται και σχεδιάζεται, στην πράξη θα πρέπει να έχει την ευελιξία να προ-
σαρμόζεται και να διαμορφώνεται ανάλογα με τις αντιδράσεις των μαθητών σε δραστη-
ριότητες ελέγχου των προαπαιτούμενων, αλλά και των βασικών γνώσεων και δεξιοτήτων.
Αρχικά, προτείνεται ο σχεδιασμός της διαφοροποιημένης διδασκαλίας με βάση την
ιεράρχηση των δραστηριοτήτων από τις προαπαιτούμενες στις βασικές, από το απλό στο
σύνθετο και από το συγκλίνον στο αποκλίνον. Η ιεράρχηση των δραστηριοτήτων μπορεί
50
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 51
να ονομαστεί και «κάθετη διαφοροποίηση», με δεδομένο ότι αφορά στο σύνολο μίας πο-
ρείας που αρχίζει από το απλό, το γνωστό και, μέσα από οργανωμένα βήματα, ο μαθητής
προχωρεί μέχρι το σημείο που ο ίδιος μπορεί να φτάσει. Στο Διάγραμμα 3 φαίνεται ξε-
κάθαρα η ιεράρχηση των δραστηριοτήτων, με τις πρώτες δύο δραστηριότητες να αφο-
ρούν στις προαπαιτούμενες γνώσεις και να προετοιμάζουν την εισαγωγή στη νέα γνώση.
Οι δραστηριότητες αυτές αφορούν, κυρίως, σε δραστηριότητες επαναφοράς της προ-
απαιτούμενης γνώσης μέσα από ιδεοθύελλα, μικρές διερευνήσεις (Κουτσελίνη, 2008),
προβλήματα και δραστηριότητες που χρειάζονται πολύ λίγο χρόνο εργασίας και είναι εύ-
κολες στον έλεγχό τους από τον εκπαιδευτικό. Ως δραστηριότητες επαναφοράς και ελέγ-
χου των προαπαιτούμενων γνώσεων και δεξιοτήτων μπορούν να χρησιμοποιηθούν,
ανάλογα και με γνωστικό αντικείμενο, ανοικτού και κλειστού τύπου εργασίες, ενώ μπο-
ρεί οι δραστηριότητες αυτές να είναι διαβαθμισμένες ή και διαφοροποιημένες. Δραστη-
ριότητες που μπορούν να χρησιμοποιηθούν για την επαναφορά και αξιολόγηση της
προαπαιτούμενης γνώσης είναι το δελτίο εισόδου, η τρίλιζα, τα «post it», που αφορούν
σε γνωστές τεχνικές διαφοροποίησης της εργασίας.
Ȉ ϭ Ʌɸʌɿʍʍʊʏɸʌɻ;ʋɸʌɿʉʌɿʍʅɹʆɻʖʌʉʆɿʃɳͿ
Ȋ
ȃ Ϯ ɸʇɳʍʃɻʍɻʍɸʋʌʉɲʋɲɿʏʉʑʅɸʆɸʎɶʆʙʍɸɿʎ
Ǽ ʃɲɿɷɸʇɿʊʏɻʏɸʎ
ȋ
Ǿ ϯ Ʌɸʌɿʍʍʊʏɸʌɻ;ʋɸʌɿʉʌɿʍʅɹʆɻʖʌʉʆɿʃɳͿ
Ȉ
ϰ ɸʇɳʍʃɻʍɻɶɿɲʏɻʆɸʋʀʏɸʐʇɻʏʉʐʍʏʊʖʉʐ
ǹ
Ȅ ϱ
ǿ H ʋʄɸɿʉʆʊʏɻʏɲ ȴɿɲɴɳɽʅɿʍɻɸʌɶɲʍɿʙʆʅɸɴɳʍɻʏʉʆ
ȅ ʏʘʆʅɲɽɻʏʙʆ ʍʐɶʃɸʃʌɿʅɹʆʉʍʏʊʖʉ
ȁ ϲ ɲʆɲʅɹʆɸʏɲɿʆɲ
ȅ ʔʏɳʍɸɿʍʏʉ
ī ʍɻʅɸʀʉɲʐʏʊ ȴɿɲʔʉʌʉʋʉʀɻʍɻʍʏʉɸʋʀʋɸɷʉ
Ǿ
Ȉ
ϳ ʍʐʆɽɸʏʊʏɻʏɲʎʃɲʏɳʃʏɻʍɻʎʏʉʐʍʏʊʖʉʐ
Ǿ ϴ
ȵʌɶɲʍʀɸʎʋʉʐɲʋɲɿʏɸʀʏɲɿɻʖʌɼʍɻ
ɲʆʙʏɸʌʘʆʆʉɻʏɿʃʙʆɷɸʇɿʉʏɼʏʘʆ
Διάγραμμα 3: Όταν η «καρδιά» της διαφοροποίησης κτυπά (Βαλιαντή & Νεοφύτου, 2017)
Πέρα από το αρχικό στάδιο της διδασκαλίας, είναι σημαντικό ο εκπαιδευτικός να αν-
τιληφθεί ότι η ιεραρχημένη πορεία διδασκαλίας που θα σχεδιάσει και θα εφαρμόσει του
δίνει τη δυνατότητα, με διαφορετικές πιθανώς κάθε φορά μεθόδους (τρόπους-δραστη-
ριότητες), να προβαίνει σε διάγνωση του επιπέδου κατάκτησης της προαπαιτούμενης
γνώσης των μαθητών και σταδιακά να ελέγχει το επίπεδο κατάκτησης της νέας γνώσης,
προσαρμόζοντας ανάλογα το επίπεδο και τον χρόνο εργασίας των μαθητών σε κάθε στά-
51
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 52
διο της μαθησιακής διαδικασίας. Η έμφαση που δίνεται από τον εκπαιδευτικό στις πυ-
ρηνικές γνώσεις, οι οποίες επανέρχονται και ελέγχονται συστηματικά, δίνει την ευκαιρία
στους αδύνατους μαθητές να κατακτήσουν τις πυρηνικές αυτές γνώσεις και στους πιο κα-
λούς μαθητές να επαναφέρουν τις γνώσεις αυτές και να τις χρησιμοποιήσουν. Οι πυρη-
νικές γνώσεις, μέσα από τη διαδικασία αυτή, αποκτούν μονιμότητα και γίνονται κτήμα
των μαθητών, δημιουργώντας ένα γερό οικοδόμημα για τις νέες γνώσεις. Οι εκπαιδευτι-
κοί που έχουν δοκιμάσει να εργαστούν με τον τρόπο αυτό έχουν δηλώσει ότι αρχικά η
διαδικασία αυτή ήταν χρονοβόρα, μιας και υπήρχαν αρκετές προαπαιτούμενες γνώσεις
που δεν είχαν κατακτηθεί, και θα έπρεπε να αναλωθεί χρόνος είτε για επαναδιδασκαλία
τους είτε για επαναφορά και διόρθωση παρανοήσεων. Σταδιακά οι μαθητές κατακτού-
σαν τις γνώσεις και τις δεξιότητες αυτές και δεν υπήρχε η ανάγκη αυτή πλέον, ενώ οι μα-
θητές μπορούσαν αποτελεσματικότερα να εργαστούν και να κατακτήσουν τη νέα γνώση.
Αυτό απαιτεί συνειδητά και μεθοδικά από τον εκπαιδευτικό να σχεδιάζει και με υπομονή
να οικοδομεί πάνω σε αυτά που ήδη κατέχουν οι μαθητές και όχι απλά να διδάσκει την ύλη
του, την οποία θα στηρίζει σε ανύπαρκτη θεμελιώδη γνώση.
Για τη λειτουργική και συστηματική εφαρμογή της διαφοροποίησης θα πρέπει, στο
σημείο αυτό, να επισημανθεί ότι τόσο για τον ιεραρχημένο σχεδιασμό της διαφοροποί-
ησης όσο και για τη συνεχή αξιολόγηση και διάγνωση του επιπέδου των μαθητών μπορούν
να αξιοποιηθούν, κατά πρώτον, οι δραστηριότητες των εγχειριδίων. Ο εκπαιδευτικός θα
επιλέξει, σύμφωνα με τους στόχους της διδασκαλίας του, ποιες εργασίες μπορούν να
αξιοποιηθούν, από ποιους μαθητές και σε ποιο σημείο της διδασκαλίας. Οι δραστηριό-
τητες αυτές θα ιεραρχηθούν και κάποιες, πιθανότατα, να χρειαστούν αλλαγές, τροπο-
ποιήσεις ή προσαρμογές, ώστε να ανταποκρίνονται στις ανάγκες και στο επίπεδο των
μαθητών και να οδηγούν στην εκπλήρωση του σκοπού της διδασκαλίας. Για την αξιοποί-
ηση των δραστηριοτήτων του εγχειριδίου και όχι μόνο, ο εκπαιδευτικός πρέπει έχει τέτοιες
διδακτικές δεξιότητες, ώστε να μπορεί με ευελιξία να αξιοποιεί τις δυνατότητες που του
προσφέρει αυτή τη φορά η διαβάθμιση των δραστηριοτήτων.
Πρέπει να γίνει σαφές ότι δεν αποκλείουμε κανέναν μαθητή από τις πιο σύνθετες δρα-
στηριότητες. Αντίθετα, η συνεχής παρατήρηση και αξιολόγηση των μαθητών δίνει τη δυ-
νατότητα δυναμικής προσαρμογής της εργασίας τους, ώστε να είναι ανάλογη με το
επίπεδο ετοιμότητάς τους τη δεδομένη στιγμή. Ο μαθητής που σταδιακά ανεβαίνει και
μπορεί να ανέβει περισσότερο λαμβάνει εργασίες με ανάλογο βαθμό πρόκλησης· αντί-
θετα, ο μαθητής που θεωρείται ότι στερείται απλούστερων δεξιοτήτων, θα πρέπει να ερ-
γαστεί σε χαμηλότερο επίπεδο πρόκλησης, που θα του επιτρέψει σταδιακά να ανέβει
(Νεοφύτου & Βαλιαντή, 2015). Η διαφοροποίηση αποτελεί, συνεπώς, μια δυναμική δια-
δικασία, η οποία βασίζεται στη δυνατότητα που της προσδίδει ο ευέλικτος προγραμμα-
τισμός (Orlich, Harder, Callahan, Trevisan, & Brown, 2012; Tomlinson, 2001).
Κατά τον προγραμματισμό της διδασκαλίας λαμβάνονται πρόνοιες για δραστηριότητες εμ-
πέδωσης και εξάσκησης ή ακόμα και για μετασχηματισμό της γνώσης και αυτές εισάγονται εμ-
βόλιμα στη διδασκαλία, υπό τη μορφή δραστηριοτήτων αγκυροβολίας. Η αξία των εργασιών
αγκυροβολίας έγκειται στη μεγιστοποίηση της ενεργοποίησης των μαθητών εις το έργον, σε
δραστηριότητες που έχουν για τον κάθε μαθητή προσθετική μαθησιακή αξία και νόημα.
Επίσης, ο εκπαιδευτικός προνοεί για τα μέσα και τα υλικά που θα χρειαστούν κατά τη
διδασκαλία και οργανώνει την πρόσβαση των μαθητών σε αυτά, ώστε να μην υπάρχει ση-
μαντική απώλεια διδακτικού χρόνου και να μην ενοχλείται το σύνολο της τάξης από τις
52
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 53
53
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 54
μογής της διαφοροποιημένης διδασκαλίας. Αντίθετα, η πρόνοιά τους κατά τον σχεδια-
σμό στηρίζει τη δυναμική προσαρμογή της διδασκαλίας.
Γίνεται αναφορά στις ακόλουθες στρατηγικές διαφοροποιημένης διδασκαλίας:
1. Σχεδιασμός μαθήματος με βάση την ιεράρχηση δραστηριοτήτων (Hierarchical order
of activities)
2. Ασύγχρονη εργασία και μάθηση (Asynchronous work and learning)
3. Εργασία των μαθητών με βάση τη διαφοροποιημένη διδασκαλία (Students’ work ro-
utine)
4. Διαβάθμιση δραστηριοτήτων (Tiered activities)
5. Δραστηριότητες Αγκυροβολίας (Anchor activities)
6. Ευέλικτη Ομαδοποίηση (Flexible grouping)
7. Σύμπτυξη Προγράμματος Σπουδών (Curriculum compacting)
Στη συνέχεια, γίνεται αναφορά στις πιο κάτω τεχνικές διαφοροποιημένης διδασκα-
λίας:
1. Δελτία Εισόδου και Εξόδου (Exit – Entrance slips)
2. Μαθησιακά Στηρίγματα (Learning braces)
3. ΡΑΦΤ (Raft)
4. Τρίλιζα (Tic-tac-Toe)
Στη βιβλιογραφία μπορεί να βρει κανείς και άλλες τεχνικές διαφοροποίησης της δι-
δασκαλίας, τις οποίες σταδιακά και συνειδητοποιημένα μπορεί να εντάξει στη διδασκα-
λία του. Οι εκπαιδευτικοί θα πρέπει να εξοικειωθούν με το τι ακριβώς είναι η
διαφοροποιημένη διδασκαλία, ώστε να μπορέσουν να χρησιμοποιήσουν στρατηγικές και
τεχνικές που προτείνονται, αλλά και να διαμορφώσουν δικές τους τεχνικές και στρατηγι-
κές για τη διαφοροποίηση της διδασκαλίας τους.
54
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 55
διακά, γίνονται σύνθετες, ενώ από χαμηλού επιπέδου γνωστικές λειτουργίες που απαι-
τούνται στα αρχικά στάδια, στην πορεία απαιτούνται υψηλότερου βαθμού.
Ο εκπαιδευτικός, σύμφωνα με τον σκοπό και τους στόχους του μαθήματος, καλείται να
ιεραρχήσει τις δραστηριότητες, ξεκινώντας με αυτές που αποσκοπούν στην επαναφορά
και στον έλεγχο της προαπαιτούμενης γνώσης. Στη συνέχεια, ο εκπαιδευτικός παρέχει
στους μαθητές δραστηριότητες εργασίας, εξάσκησης, εμπέδωσης και επέκτασης της νέας
γνώσης, ξεκινώντας από πολύ απλές δραστηριότητες και καταλήγοντας σε πιο σύνθετες
και απαιτητικές. Κατά τη διάρκεια ενός μαθήματος που βασίζεται στην ιεράρχηση των
δραστηριοτήτων, όλοι οι μαθητές μπορούν να εργαστούν στο μέγιστο των δυνατοτήτων
τους με βάση το επίπεδο τους, κατακτώντας έτσι τους στόχους του μαθήματος και προ-
χωρώντας πέρα από αυτούς στον μετασχηματισμό των νέων γνώσεων και δεξιοτήτων.
Είναι σημαντικό να επισημανθεί ότι δεν αναμένεται να εργαστούν όλοι οι μαθητές σε
όλες τις δραστηριότητες ή να αποκτήσουν τη μετασχηματιστική γνώση του μαθήματος. Η
μετασχηματιστική γνώση καθορίζεται από τον εκπαιδευτικό, έχοντας υπόψη του τους πιο
ικανούς μαθητές, οι οποίοι μπορούν να προχωρήσουν και πέρα από τη βασική γνώση.
Επιπλέον, οι εκπαιδευτικοί θα πρέπει να έχουν υπόψη τους ότι δεν αναμένεται όλοι οι μα-
θητές να αποκτήσουν τη βασική γνώση με τον ίδιο τρόπο ή στον ίδιο βαθμό. Παρόλα
αυτά, όλοι οι μαθητές αναμένεται να έχουν ευκαιρίες ενεργητικής συμμετοχής και εμ-
πλοκής στη μαθησιακή διαδικασία, που θα τους επιτρέπει να προχωρήσουν ένα βήμα πα-
ρακάτω από τη δική τους προσωπική μαθησιακή αφετηρία.
Ο σχεδιασμός ενός μαθήματος με βάση την ιεράρχηση των δραστηριοτήτων δίνει την
ευκαιρία στους μαθητές να εργαστούν σε δραστηριότητες που τους επιτρέπουν να τις
ολοκληρώσουν με βάση τον δικό τους ρυθμό, δημιουργώντας έτσι τη δυνατότητα ασύγ-
χρονης εργασίας των μαθητών (Βαλιαντή, 2013; Νεοφύτου & Βαλιαντή, 2015). Το κύριο
πλεονέκτημα της ασύγχρονης εργασίας είναι η προώθηση της ανεξάρτητης και εξατομι-
κευμένης μάθησης.
55
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 56
2017). Με τον τρόπο αυτό λαμβάνονται υπόψη οι ανάγκες όλων των μαθητών, ενώ τους
δίδεται η ευκαιρία να συμμετέχουν ενεργά σε δραστηριότητες που έχουν νόημα για αυ-
τούς ή τους προκαλούν το ενδιαφέρον. Η διαφοροποιημένη διδασκαλία προάγει την ασύγ-
χρονη και εξατομικευμένη εργασία των μαθητών, με βάση τον δικό τους ρυθμό μάθησης,
σε καθημερινή βάση. Η ατομική εργασία αναμένεται, με τις οδηγίες του εκπαιδευτικού,
να ακολουθείται από τη συνεργατική εργασία και, στη συνέχεια, από την εργασία με τη
συμμετοχή ολόκληρης της τάξης.
3.1.3. Η ρουτίνα εργασίας των μαθητών για την οικοδόμηση νέας γνώσης στη διαφο-
ροποιημένη διδασκαλία.
Δεδομένου ότι ο κάθε μαθητής έχει το δικό του σημείο αφετηρίας, οι εκπαιδευτικοί θα
πρέπει να παρέχουν στους μαθητές την ευκαιρία να ανακαλέσουν την προηγούμενη
γνώση που αποκτήθηκε σε προηγούμενη διδακτική ενότητα. Με τον τρόπο αυτό, οι μα-
θητές μπορούν να αρχίσουν να εργάζονται ατομικά, με βάση τη δική τους προσωπική
αφετηρία, έτσι ώστε ο εκπαιδευτικός να μπορέσει να εντοπίσει παρανοήσεις ή ελλείψεις
που μπορεί να υπάρχουν στην προαπαιτούμενη γνώση. Ενώ οι μαθητές εργάζονται ατο-
μικά, ο εκπαιδευτικός μπορεί να τους παρέχει την ανάλογη στήριξη, δίδοντας παράλληλα
χρόνο στον κάθε μαθητή να εργαστεί, να μάθει και να προχωρήσει ασύγχρονα στις ιε-
ραρχημένες δραστηριότητες. Μόλις ο εκπαιδευτικός νιώσει ότι οι μαθητές έχουν εργαστεί
ικανοποιητικά σε συγκεκριμένες δραστηριότητες, καλεί τους μαθητές να εργαστούν στα
ζευγάρια ή στις ομάδες τους, με σκοπό την ανταλλαγή ιδεών σχετικά με τις δραστηριό-
τητες στις οποίες έχουν εργαστεί. Εντός των ομάδων, δίδεται στους μαθητές η ευκαιρία
να αλληλοεπιδράσουν τόσο με τους συνομηλίκους τους όσο και με τον εκπαιδευτικό, να
αναθεωρήσουν τις ιδέες τους και να εμπλουτίσουν την εργασία τους προτού την παρου-
σιάσουν στην τάξη (Διάγραμμα 4). Η ρουτίνα αυτή επιτρέπει στους μαθητές να βιώσουν
τη μάθηση σε αυθεντικές καταστάσεις (Βαλιαντή, 2013).
ɀȰȺȸɈȸɇ ȵȾɅȰȻȴȵɉɈȻȾɃɇ
- ȵʇɲʏʉʅɿʃɸʐʅɹʆɻ
ϭ͘Ȱʏʉʅɿʃɼɸʌɶɲʍʀɲ ɴʉɼɽɸɿɲʃɲɿʍʏɼʌɿʇɻ
ʏʘʆʅɲɽɻʏʙʆ
- ɀɲɽɻʍɿɲʃɳ
ʍʏɻʌʀɶʅɲʏɲ
- ȵʋɿʃʉɿʆʘʆʀɲʃɲɿ
ϯ͘ȵʌɶɲʍʀɲʏʘʆ Ϯ͘ȵʌɶɲʍʀɲʏʘʆ ʍʏɼʌɿʇɻʏʘʆʅɲɽɻʏʙʆ
ʅɲɽɻʏʙʆʅɸ ʅɲɽɻʏʙʆʍʏɻʆʉʅɳɷɲ - ȶʄɸɶʖʉʎʏɻʎɸʌɶɲʍʀɲʎ
ʉʄʊʃʄɻʌɻʏɻʏɳʇɻ ɼʏʉɺɸʐɶɳʌɿʏʉʐʎ ʏʘʆʅɲɽɻʏʙʆ
- Ȱʇɿʉʄʊɶɻʍɻʃɲɿ
ʍʐʅʋʄɼʌʘʍɻʍʏʊʖʘʆ
Διάγραμμα 4 : Η εργασία των μαθητών και η ρουτίνα μάθησής τους στην τάξη (Βαλιαντή, 2013)
56
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 57
Στάδια εφαρμογής
• Δημιουργία δραστηριότητας μέτριας δυσκολίας.
• Μείωση του επιπέδου συνθετότητας και δυσκολίες της δραστηριότητας, ώστε να
μπορούν να εργαστούν οι λιγότερο ικανοί μαθητές.
• Αύξηση του βαθμού δυσκολίας της δραστηριότητας, ώστε να υπάρχει ο ανάλογος
βαθμός πρόκλησης για τους πολύ ικανούς μαθητές.
57
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:33 58
58
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 59
59
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 60
Παράδειγμα 4
Διαβαθμισμένη δραστηριότητα στο μάθημα της Γλώσσας: Να γράψτε μια έκθεση επι-
χειρημάτων (Heacox, 2002)
Επίπεδο Αρχικό Μεσαίο Προχωρημένο
Αποτέλεσμα/ Οι μαθητές θα κληθούν Οι μαθητές θα Οι μαθητές θα
Στόχος να γράψουν μια υποστηρίξουν μία εκφράσουν την
παράγραφο που να άποψη μέσα από άποψή τους μέσα
αποτελείται από πέντε δύο παραγράφους, από μια έκθεση
προτάσεις, για να οι οποίες θα που θα αποτελείται
υποστηρίξουν μια υπερασπίζονται την από, τουλάχιστον,
άποψη. Η παράγραφος άποψη αυτή. πέντε παραγράφους,
θα πρέπει να ενώ θα κληθούν να
περιλαμβάνει τρεις χρησιμοποιήσουν
υποστηρικτικές πολλές πηγές, για
προτάσεις, μια να μπορέσουν να
πρόταση για το υπερασπιστούν την
συμπέρασμα και μια άποψη αυτή.
για την κύρια ιδέα.
Οδηγίες/ Στους μαθητές δίνεται Στους μαθητές Οι μαθητές θα μελετή-
Δραστηριότητα παράδειγμα μιας δίνεται παράδειγμα σουν τον οδηγό για τη
παραγράφου που να μιας έκθεσης συγγραφή έκθεσης επι-
αποτελείται από πέντε επιχειρημάτων και χειρημάτων και θα αξιο-
προτάσεις, καθώς και ο οδηγός για τη ποιήσουν τις πηγές που
σαφείς οδηγίες για το συγγραφή έκθεσης έχουν στη διάθεσή τους.
πώς να γράψουν την επιχειρημάτων. Οι Στους μαθητές θα πρέπει
παράγραφο. μαθητές θα λάβουν, να δοθούν σαφείς οδη-
Αρχικά, οι μαθητές θα επίσης, σαφείς γίες για το πώς θα εργα-
κληθούν να οδηγίες για το πώς στούν και θα χρησιμοποι-
καταγράψουν το θέμα να γράψουν μια ήσουν τις πηγές στην έκ-
τους και να πειστική έκθεση. θεσή τους. Αρχικά, οι μα-
δημιουργήσουν μια Αρχικά, οι μαθητές θητές θα οργανώσουν
λίστα με, τουλάχιστον, θα πρέπει, με την έκθεσή τους με βάση
τρία πράγματα που βάση τον οδηγό, τον οδηγό. Οι μαθητές
υποστηρίζουν το θέμα να σχεδιάσουν θα πρέπει να δημιουργή-
αυτό. την έκθεσή τους. σουν και έναν κατάλογο
των πέντε πηγών που τους
βοήθησαν να υποστηρί-
ξουν την άποψή τους.
Αξιολόγηση Οι μαθητές θα πρέπει Οι μαθητές θα είναι Οι μαθητές θα πρέπει να
να είναι σε θέση να σε θέση να εκφρά- είναι σε θέση να γρά-
γράψουν μια σουν μια άποψη και ψουν μια έκθεση που
παράγραφο με πέντε να την υπερασπι- να αποτελείται από πέντε
προτάσεις, στις οποίες στούν με τη δημιουρ- παραγράφους και στην
θα υποστηρίζεται μια γία δύο παραγρά- οποία θα εκφράζεται
60
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 61
Στάδια εφαρμογής
1. Δημιουργία δραστηριοτήτων: Για να εφαρμοστεί αυτή η στρατηγική, θα πρέπει
πρώτα να δημιουργηθούν οι δραστηριότητες αγκυροβολίας που θα συμπίπτουν με
τους στόχους του μαθήματος και οι οποίες θα μπορούν να χρησιμοποιηθούν σε
συγκεκριμένα στάδια του μαθήματος. Οι δραστηριότητες μπορούν να ποικίλλουν
ανάλογα με το επίπεδο ικανοτήτων των μαθητών, καθώς και με τα ενδιαφέροντά
τους. Κάποιες δραστηριότητες μπορεί να είναι για εμπέδωση, ενώ κάποιες άλλες
μπορεί να είναι για τον μετασχηματισμό γνώσεων και δεξιοτήτων. Κατά τη δημι-
ουργία των δραστηριοτήτων προνοούμε ώστε οι μαθητές να μπορούν να εργα-
στούν μόνοι τους ή με τη χρήση υλικών και μέσων, χωρίς να χρειάζονται τη βοήθεια
του εκπαιδευτικού.
61
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 62
62
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 63
Στάδια εφαρμογής
1. Διερεύνηση από τον εκπαιδευτικό μέσω του ερωτήματος, «Ποιος είναι ο καλύτερος
τρόπος διαμόρφωσης των ομάδων για την πιο αποτελεσματική εργασία και μά-
θηση, σχετικά με τη συγκεκριμένη γνώση και δραστηριότητα;» .
2. Αξιολόγηση όλων των δεδομένων και έλεγχος των χαρακτηριστικών των μαθητών
που θα βοηθήσουν στην ομαδοποίησή τους .
3. Καθορισμός του τρόπου/κριτηρίου ομαδοποίησης. Για παράδειγμα, οι μαθητές
μπορούν να τοποθετηθούν σε ομάδες με βάση το φύλο τους, την προηγούμενη
τους ομάδα, την επιλογή τους, την επιλογή του εκπαιδευτικού ή με βάση οποιοδή-
ποτε κριτήριο αποφασίσει να χρησιμοποιήσει ο εκπαιδευτικός.
63
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 64
Στάδια εφαρμογής
1. Προσδιορισμός των στόχων και των σκοπών μιας συγκεκριμένης διδασκαλίας
2. Συμμετοχή των μαθητών στη διαδικασία αξιολόγησης
3. Αξιολόγηση των ικανοτήτων των μαθητών σε μια συγκεκριμένη περιοχή
4. Παροχή εναλλακτικών δραστηριοτήτων που προκαλούν το ενδιαφέρον των μαθη-
τών
5. Προετοιμασία ενός ατομικού οδηγού εκπαιδευτικού προγραμματισμού που να πε-
ριλαμβάνει:
- Τις περιοχές του Α.Π. που θα μπορούσαν να τύχουν συμπίεσης: Σύντομη περι-
γραφή του βασικού υλικού που θα μπορούσε να καλυφθεί και πληροφορίες για
την ανάγκη συμπίεσης.
- Διαδικασίες και δραστηριότητες για τη συμπίεση βασικών γνώσεων και δεξιο-
τήτων: Περιγραφή δραστηριοτήτων που να εξασφαλίζουν την επάρκεια σε βα-
σικές γνώσεις και δεξιότητες του Α.Π.
Τεχνικές στην τάξη
• Συνδιδασκαλία των μαθητών (ως εναλλακτική λύση, ο μαθητής μπορεί να επο-
πτεύει τους άλλους μαθητές στην τάξη)
• Συνεργατική μάθηση
• Αυτόνομη εργασία (ατομική ή σε ζευγάρια), διερεύνηση και πρόταση λύσεων σε
ένα πρόβλημα σχετικό με το περιεχόμενο (συμμετοχή σε δραστηριότητες που να
εξυπηρετούν την κοινότητα).
• Παροχή κατευθυντήριων γραμμών αξιολόγησης (κριτήρια), ώστε οι μαθητές να
μπορέσουν να βαθμολογήσουν την πρόοδο της μάθησής τους πάνω σε ένα θέμα.
64
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 65
65
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 66
Παράδειγμα 1: Δελτίο εισόδου για το μάθημα της Ιστορίας (Βαλιαντή & Νεοφύτου, 2017)
Στόχος μαθήματος: Οι μαθητές θα πρέπει να είναι σε θέση να προσδιορίσουν και να μι-
λήσουν για τις διαφορές ανάμεσα στην Παλαιολιθική και στη Νεολιθική εποχή.
Προαπαιτούμενη γνώση: Οι μαθητές θα πρέπει να είναι σε θέση να προσδιορίσουν και να
μιλήσουν για τα κύρια χαρακτηριστικά της Παλαιολιθικής εποχής. Ο εκπαιδευτικός θα ζη-
τήσει από τους μαθητές να εργαστούν στο δελτίο εισόδου, για να αξιολογήσει τις γνώσεις
τους στο συγκεκριμένο θέμα, το οποίο έχουν προηγουμένως διδαχθεί και είναι απαραί-
τητο για τη διδασκαλία της νέας ενότητας.
Δελτίο εισόδου
επιλέξτε και εργαστε’ιτε σε μια από τις ακόλουθες δραστηριότητες:
1. Γράψτε μερικές λέξεις (ή προτάσεις) που σας έρχονται στο μυαλό, όταν ακούσετε
τη φράση «Παλαιολιθική Εποχή».
2. Σχεδιάστε μια εικόνα που να έχει σχέση με την Παλαιολιθική Εποχή και μιλήστε
για αυτή στην τάξη.
66
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 67
Παράδειγμα 2: Δελτίο εισόδου στο μάθημα των Μαθηματικών (Βαλιαντή & Νεοφύτου,
2017). Στόχος διδασκαλίας: Εμβαδόν γεωμετρικών σχημάτων
Ɉɿɶʆʘʌʀɺɸʏɸɶɿɲʏɲʋɿʉʃɳʏʘʍʖɼʅɲʏɲ͖
1. ȳʌɳʗʏɸʃɳʏʘɲʋʊʃɳɽɸʍʖɼʅɲʏʉʊʆʉʅɳʏʉʐ͘
2. ȳʌɳʗʏɸʏɲʃʑʌɿɲʖɲʌɲʃʏɻʌɿʍʏɿʃɳ;ɶʘʆʀɸʎ͕ʋʄɸʐʌɹʎͿʏʉʐʃɳɽɸʍʖɼʅɲʏʉʎ͘
Γενικευμένες κατηγορίες και παραδείγματα δελτίων εξόδου (Fisher & Frey, 2004):
• Βοηθήματα που καταγράφουν τη μάθηση:
Γράψτε ένα πράγμα που έχετε μάθει σήμερα.
Συζητήστε με ποιον τρόπο θα μπορούσε το σημερινό μάθημα να χρησιμοποι-
ηθεί στον πραγματικό κόσμο.
• Βοηθήματα που εστιάζουν στη διαδικασία της μάθησης:
Δεν κατάλαβα…
Γράψτε μια ερώτηση που έχετε για το σημερινό μάθημα.
• Βοηθήματα που αξιολογούν την αποτελεσματικότητα της μάθησης:
Σας άρεσε που εργαστήκατε σε μικρές ομάδες σήμερα;
67
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 68
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Name____________________________________ Class____________
68
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 69
Παραδείγματα:
• Οι πίνακες του πολλαπλασιασμού μπορούν να χρησιμοποιηθούν ως νοητικό στή-
ριγμα στη διδασκαλία της διαίρεσης.
• Ένα χαρτόνι με διάφορα χρονικά επιρρήματα που μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί στην
αφήγηση μιας ιστορίας.
• Μια λίστα με επίθετα που μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί για τη συγγραφή μιας δημι-
ουργικής έκθεσης.
69
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 70
θαρρύνουν τους μαθητές να γράφουν δημιουργικά, να εξετάζουν ένα θέμα από μια δια-
φορετική οπτική γωνία και να εξασκηθούν στο πώς χρησιμοποιούν τη γλώσσα, όταν απευ-
θύνονται σε διαφορετικά ακροατήρια. Η συγκεκριμένη στρατηγική βοηθά τους μαθητές
να αποκτήσουν σημαντικές δεξιότητες γραφής, όπως το γράψιμο για ένα συγκεκριμένο
κοινό, την έκφραση της κύριας ιδέας και την οργάνωση του λόγου στη βάση διαφορετικών
κειμενικών ειδών για την επίτευξη διαφορετικών στόχων. Το ΡΑΦΤ δίνει τη δυνατότητα
στους μαθητές να επιλέξουν και να εργαστούν με σχετική ελευθερία στη βάση τεσσάρων
δεδομένων που καθορίζονται από την εκάστοτε επιλογή. Διδάσκει τους μαθητές να σκέ-
φτονται δημιουργικά, απαντώντας στις ακόλουθες ερωτήσεις:
Ρόλος του συγγραφέα (Role of the Writer): Ποιος είσαι εσύ ως συγγραφέας; (ένας πρό-
εδρος, ένα παιχνίδι, ένας συγκεκριμένος χαρακτήρας). Ποιον ρόλο διαδραματίζεις στην
ιστορία; Πώς μπορεί να επηρεάσει ο ρόλος σου αυτός το γράψιμό σου;
Ακροατήριο (Audience): Σε ποιον γράφεις; (σε έναν συμμαθητή σου, στον δάσκαλό σου,
στους αναγνώστες μιας εφημερίδας;) Ποια είναι η σωστή γλώσσα που θα πρέπει να χρη-
σιμοποιήσεις, όταν απευθύνεσαι στο συγκεκριμένο κοινό;
Φόρμα (Format): Ποια η μορφή αυτού που γράφεις; (ένα γράμμα, ένα ποίημα, μια ομιλία).
Τίτλος (Topic): Για ποιο θέμα γράφεις; Για ποιον λόγο; Ποιο είναι το νόημα που θέλεις να
περάσεις;
Στάδια εφαρμογής
1. Αναγνώριση των μαθησιακών στόχων του μαθήματος/κεφαλαίου.
2. Χρήση μέσων αξιολόγησης και των προφίλ των μαθητών, για να προσδιοριστούν τα
επίπεδα ετοιμότητας των μαθητών, το στυλ μάθησής τους και τα ενδιαφέροντά
τους.
3. Σχεδιασμός διαφόρων δραστηριοτήτων που να διαφέρουν σε μορφή, θέμα, ανα-
γνωστικό κοινό και ρόλο του συγγραφέα.
4. Τοποθέτηση των δραστηριοτήτων RAFT σε χαρτόνι.
5. Αξιολόγηση των ακόλουθων:
- Απευθύνονται σε μαθητές με διαφορετικά στυλ μάθησης;
- Υπάρχουν διαφορετικά επίπεδα δυσκολίας στον ρόλο, στη μορφή κειμένου και
στα επίπεδα ετοιμότητας;
- Ο ρόλος, η μορφή κειμένου ή το θέμα εμπίπτουν στα ενδιαφέροντα όλων των
μαθητών;
Τεχνικές στην τάξη
Η στρατηγική RAFT υιοθετεί πολλαπλούς τρόπους αντιμετώπισης των αναγκών όλων
των μαθητών με βάση το επίπεδό τους. Πιθανές ιδέες για εφαρμογή της στρατηγικής
RAFT: χαρακτήρες από μια ιστορία, ιστορικές φιγούρες, θέσεις εργασίας, βασικοί όροι,
επιστήμονες ή πολιτικοί, μουσικά όργανα, ασθένειες, γεωγραφικοί σχηματισμοί, λεξιλό-
γιο-λέξεις, χαρακτήρες κινουμένων σχεδίων, είδη υφασμάτων, συνθέτες ή καλλιτέχνες,
όργανα ή εργαλεία, σχήματα ή χρώματα, συγγραφείς ή εφευρέτες, βιομήχανοι, ορυκτά ή
χημικά στοιχεία, πόλεις, χώρες ή ήπειροι, τεχνικοί όροι κ.λπ. Μπορεί, επίσης, να χρησι-
μοποιηθεί κατά τη διάρκεια του μαθήματος των Μαθηματικών.
70
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 71
Στάδια εφαρμογής
1. Προσδιορισμός του σκοπού και των στόχων του μαθήματος ή της ενότητας.
2. Αξιοποίηση στοιχείων για το προφίλ των μαθητών, την ετοιμότητα και τα ενδιαφέ-
71
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:34 72
ροντά τους.
3. Σχεδιασμός εννέα διαφορετικών δραστηριοτήτων με βάση τις γνώσεις/δεξιότητες
που παρέχει το μάθημα ή η ενότητα (διαφοροποίηση αν θα χρησιμοποιηθεί για
προ-αξιολόγηση, εμπέδωση, εξάσκηση ή τελική αξιολόγηση).
4. Τοποθέτηση όλων των δραστηριοτήτων στον πίνακα της τρίλιζας και τοποθέτηση
της δραστηριότητας που θα πρέπει να συμπληρώσουν όλοι οι μαθητές στο κέντρο
του πίνακα.
5. Οι μαθητές, στη συνέχεια, επιλέγουν τρεις δραστηριότητες, μία εκ των οποίων θα
πρέπει να είναι αυτή που βρίσκεται στο κέντρο, ώστε να συμπληρωθεί μία γραμμή
(οριζόντια, κάθετα ή διαγώνια).
6. Οι μαθητές που ολοκληρώνουν μία γραμμή της τρίλιζας μπορούν να συνεχίσουν
και να προσπαθήσουν να ολοκληρώσουν όσο το δυνατό περισσότερες δραστηριό-
τητες και γραμμές.
72
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 73
73
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 74
πριακή Δημοκρατία. Ωστόσο, το πρώτο μάθημα που αφορά στη διδασκαλία των μαθη-
ματικών, τα οποία θεωρούνται ως η “lingua franca”, έχει επιλεγεί και μεταφραστεί σε
όλες τις γλώσσες καθώς παρέχει χρήσιμα εργαλεία και προτάσεις που μπορεί να φανούν
χρήσιμα σε όλους τους εκπαιδευτικούς, ανεξαρτήτως της χώρας στην όποια εργάζονται.
Το δεύτερο σχέδιο μαθήματος αφορά στο μάθημα της γλώσσας και σε αυτό έχουν χρησι-
μοποιηθεί, όπως και στο προηγούμενο, οι βασικές στρατηγικές και τεχνικές της διαφο-
ροποίησης ώστε να προσφέρει στους εκπαιδευτικούς την ευκαιρία να γνωρίσουν τα όσα
έχουν διαβάσει στο βιβλίο ενσωματωμένα σ’ ένα σχέδιο μαθήματος.
74
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 75
ȿʑʍɸʏɿʎɸʇɿʍʙʍɸɿʎ͕ɶɿɲʆɲʋɳʌɸɿʎʏʉɸɿʍɿʏɼʌɿʉ͊ ȴɸʄʏʀʉȵɿʍʊɷʉʐ
ȳɿɲʆɲɸʇɲʍʔɲʄʀʍɸɿʎʏʉɸɿʍɿʏɼʌɿʉɶɿɲʏʉɸʋʊʅɸʆʉʅɲɽɻʅɲʏɿʃʊʍʉʐʏɲʇʀɷɿ͕ɽɲ Ȱʇɿʉʄʊɶɻʍɻʏɻʎ
ʋʌɹʋɸɿʆɲʄʑʍɸɿʎʏɿʎʋɿʉʃɳʏʘʅɲɽɻʅɲʏɿʃɹʎʋʌʉʏɳʍɸɿʎ͘ ʋʌʉʒʋɳʌʖʉʐʍɲʎ
5xϭϬс͙͙͙ ϰϮϬрϳϬс͙͙ ɶʆʙʍɻʎ
ϱʖϭϬϬс͙͙ ϯϱϬрϱϬс͙͙
ϲϰϬϬрϴϬс͙͙͙ ϰϴϰрϰс͙͙͘
70x ϴϬс͙͙ ϰϵϬϬϬрϳϬϬс͙͙
Ȱʃʉʄʉʐɽɸʀʋʌʉɴʉʄɼʏɻʎɸʇɸʌɸʑʆɻʍɻʎʏɻʎʍ͘ϭϬϴʏʉʐɴɿɴʄʀʉʐʏʉʐʎ͘ Ȱʆʉɿʃʏɼ
ȴʌɲʍʏɻʌɿʊʏɻʏɲ ɶɿɲʆɲ
ʋɲʌɲʃɿʆɼʍɸɿʏɲ
ʋɲɿɷɿɳʆɲ
ɸʆɸʌɶʉʋʉɿɻɽʉʑʆʍʏɻ
ʅɲɽɻʍɿɲʃɼ
ɷɿɲɷɿʃɲʍʀɲ.
ȺɉɀȸɇɃɉ͊
Ɂʉɻʏɿʃɳɇʏɻʌʀɶʅɲʏɲ:
ʍɻʅɸɿʘʅɲʏɳʌɿʉ͕
ʃʑɴʉɿdienes,
ʍɸʄɿɷʉɷɸʀʃʏɻʎ
ȷɻʏɸʀʏɲɿ ʆɲ ɸʇɻɶɼʍʉʐʆ ʋʙʎ ɽɲ ɸʃʏɸʄɹʍʉʐʆ 3X6=18
ʏɻ ɷɿɲʀʌɸʍɻ ϯϵϲрϯсʆ͘ ɍʌɻʍɿʅʉʋʉɿɸʀ ʉ ʃɲɽɹʆɲʎ ϭϴрϯсϲ
ʏʉʍʏɼʌɿɶʅɲʋʉʐʖʌɸɿɳɺɸʏɲɿ͘
ϭϴрϲсϯ
Ɇʉʐʏʀʆɲɸʌɶɲʍʀɲʎ
6X16 = 6 X (10+6) Ȱʏʉʅɿʃɼɸʌɶɲʍʀɲʹ
= (6X10)+(6x6) ʉʅɲɷɿʃɼʹ ʉʄʉʅɹʄɸɿɲ
= 60 + 36
= 96
ȸɸʇɳʍʃɻʍɻʃɲɿʉɿʅɸʏɲʍʖɻʅɲʏɿʍʏɿʃɹʎɷɸʇɿʊʏɻʏɸʎʇɸʃɿʆʉʑʆɲʋʊʏɻʆɲʌʖɼʏʉʐ
ʅɲɽɼʅɲʏʉʎɶɿɲʏʉʐʎʋɿʉɿʃɲʆʉʑʎ͕ɲʔʉʑʃɲʄʉʑʆʏɲɿʆɲɸʇɻɶɼʍʉʐʆʍʏɻʆʉʅɳɷɲ ȴʌɲʍʏɻʌɿʊʏɻʏɲ
ʏʉʐʎʏʉʆʏʌʊʋʉɸʃʏɹʄɸʍɻʎʏɻʎɷɿɲʀʌɸʍɻʎ͘ Ȱɶʃʐʌʉɴʉʄʀɲʎ
ȳʀʆɸʏɲɿɶɿɲɸʅʋɹɷʘʍɻ
Ɉɲʋɲɿɷɿɳʋʉʐʄʑʆʉʐʆɶʌɼɶʉʌɲʏɻɷɿɸʌɸʑʆɻʍɻʅʋʉʌʉʑʆ͗ ɼɶɿɲʅɸʏɲʍʖɻʅɲʏɿʍʅʊ
-ʆɲʋʌʉʍʋɲɽɼʍʉʐʆʆɲɴʌʉʐʆʃɿɳʄʄʉʐʎʏʌʊʋʉʐʎɸʋʀʄʐʍɻʎʖ ʏɻʎɶʆʙʍɻʎɲʋʊ
-ʆɲʍʐɶʃʌʀʆʉʐʆʏʉʐʎʏʌʊʋʉʐʎʋʉʐɴʌɼʃɲʆʃɲɿʆɲɲʋʉʔɲʍʀʍʉʐʆʋʉɿʉʎɸʀʆɲɿʉ ʃɳʋʉɿʉʐʎʅɲɽɻʏɹʎ͘
ʃɲʄʑʏɸʌʉʎɶɿɲ ɸʃɸʀʆɲʃɲɿɶɿɲʏʀͼ
- ʆɲɶʌɳʗʉʐʆɼʆɲɸʇɻɶɼʍʉʐʆʍʏɻʆʉʅɳɷɲʏʉʐʎʏʉʆɳʄʄʉʏʌʊʋʉʋʉʐɴʌɼʃɲʆ͘
Ƀͬȸ ɸʃʋɲɿɷɸʐʏɿʃʊʎ ʋɸʌʆɳ ɲʋʊ ʏɿʎ ʉʅɳɷɸʎ ʃɲɿ ɷʀʆɸɿ ɴʉɼɽɸɿɲ ʍɸ ʊʋʉɿʉʆ ȵʇɲʏʉʅɿʃɸʐʅɹʆɻ
ʖʌɸɿɳɺɸʏɲɿ͘ ɴʉɼɽɸɿɲ
75
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 76
Ʌɲʌʉʐʍɿɳɺɸʏɲɿ ɻ ɷʌɲʍʏɻʌɿʊʏɻʏɲ ϭ ʏɻʎ ʍ͘ ϭϬϵ͕ ʊʋʉʐ ʔɲʀʆʉʆʏɲɿ ʉɿ ʏʌʊʋʉɿ ȵʆɸʌɶɻʏɿʃɼ
ʍʃɹʗɻʎʏʉʐɇʏɹʔɲʆʉʐʃɲɿʏɻʎȿʉʐʃʀɲʎʍʏɻʆɸʃʏɹʄɸʍɻʏɻʎɷɿɲʀʌɸʍɻʎϯϲϯрϯсʆ͘ ʍʐʅʅɸʏʉʖɼ
Ʌʌʉʍʉʖɼʍʏɻʆʋɿɽɲʆʊʏɻʏɲʋɲʌɲʆʊɻʍɻʎʊʏɿʇɸʃɿʆʉʑʅɸɲʋʊɲʌɿʍʏɸʌɳ-ɷɸʇɿɳͿ͘ ʍɸɲʏʉʅɿʃʊɸʋʀʋɸɷʉ͕
ɲʆɳʄʉɶɲʅɸʏɿʎ
ɿʃɲʆʊʏɻʏɸʎʃɲɿ ʏʉʆ
ʌʐɽʅʊʏʉʐʃɲɽɸʆʊʎ
Ȱʍʑɶʖʌʉʆɻɸʌɶɲʍʀɲ
Ɉɲʋɲɿɷɿɳɷɸʆ
ɸʌɶɳɺʉʆʏɲɿ
ʏɲʐʏʊʖʌʉʆɲʍʏɿʎʀɷɿɸʎ
ɷʌɲʍʏɻʌɿʊʏɻʏɸʎ͘
Ɉʉʃɳɽɸʋɲɿɷʀ
ɸʌɶɳɺɸʏɲɿʅɸʏʉʆɷɿʃʊ
ʏʉʐʌʐɽʅʊʃɲɿ
ʋʌʉʖʘʌɸʀɲʆɳʄʉɶɲ
ʋɳʆʏɲʅɸʏɿʎʉɷɻɶʀɸʎ
ʏʉʐɸʃʋɲɿɷɸʐʏɿʃʉʑ͘
Ɉɲ ʋɲɿɷɿɳ ʃɲʄʉʑʆʏɲɿ ʆɲ ɸʌɶɲʍʏʉʑʆ ʍɸ ɸʌɶɲʍʀɸʎ ʅɸʏɲʍʖɻʅɲʏɿʍʅʉʑ ʏɻʎ Ȱɶʃʐʌʉɴʉʄʀɲ
ʋʌʉɻɶʉʑʅɸʆɻʎ ɷʌɲʍʏɻʌɿʊʏɻʏɲʎ͕ ʍʏɿʎ ʉʋʉʀɸʎ ʉɿ ɷɸʃɳɷɸʎ ɷɸʆ ɷɿɲɿʌʉʑʆʏɲɿ ȵʌɶɲʍʀɸʎ
ɲʃʌɿɴʙʎ͕ʋ.ʖ͘ϰϭϮрϯБv or ϭϴϵрϵБv͘ȴʀʆɸʏɲɿʍɻʅɲʍʀɲʍʏɻʆɸʋɸʇɼɶɻʍɻʏʉʐ ʅɸʏɲʍʖɻʅɲʏɿʍʅʉʑɶɿɲ
ʏʌʊʋʉʐʍʃɹʗɻʎ;ʆɹɲɶʆʙʍɻͿ͘Ȱʔʉʑʐʋʉʄʉɶʀʍʉʐʆɲʏʉʅɿʃɳʏʉʋɻʄʀʃʉ͕ɸʄɹɶʖʉʐʆ ʊʍɲʋɲɿɷɿɳʅʋʉʌʉʑʆ
ʏɻʆɲʋɳʆʏɻʍɻʅɸʏʉʆɷɿʋʄɲʆʊʏʉʐʎʃɲɿɸʇɻɶʉʑʆʏʉʆʏʌʊʋʉʍʃɹʗɻʎʏʉʐʎ͘ ʆɲʋʌʉʖʘʌɼʍʉʐʆ.
Ɉɲʋɲɿɷɿɳɸʌɶɳɺʉʆʏɲɿʍʏɲɲʃʊʄʉʐɽɲɸʔɲʌʅʉɶʀɷɿɲ͗ Ȱʇɿʉʋʉʀɻʍɻʏɻʎ
ȴɿɲʀʌɸʍɻʅɸʏɻʖʌɼʍɻʏʘʆDienes: https://www-6.thinkcentral.com/content/hsp ʏɸʖʆʉʄʉɶʀɲʎ ɶɿɲʏɻʆ
/math/hspmath/na/common/itools_int_9780547584997_/basetenblocks.html ɲʆʏɲʋʊʃʌɿʍɻʏɻʎ
ɷɿɷɲʍʃɲʄʀɲʎʍʏʉ
ȴɿɲʀʌɸʍɻʅɸɸʃʏʀʅɻʍɻʃɲɿʅɸʖʌɼʍɻʏʉʐɲʄɶʉʌʀɽʅʉʐ͗
ʅɲɽɻʍɿɲʃʊʋʌʉʔʀʄ
https://www.matific.com/us/en-us/
ʊʄʘʆʏʘʆʅɲɽɻʏʙʆ͘
(Grade 4/Arithmetic Operations/Division and Place Value/ Somewhere Along the ȵʆɲʄʄɲʃʏɿʃɼ ʅʉʌʔɼ
Line Estimate Division: Level I) ɷʌɲʍʏɻʌɿʉʏɼʏʘʆɶɿɲ
(Grade 4/Arithmetic Operations/Division and Place Value/Got to Split Divide 3-Digit ʏɻɷɿɲʏɼʌɻʍɻʏʉʐ
Numbers) ɸʆɷɿɲʔɹʌʉʆʏʉʎʏʘʆ
ʅɲɽɻʏʙʆʃɲɿʏɻʎ
ɸʆɸʌɶɻʏɿʃɼʎʏʉʐʎ
ɸʅʋʄʉʃɼʎʍʏɻ
ɷɿɷɲʍʃɲʄʀɲ.
76
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 77
Ƀɿʋɿʉɷʐʆɲʏʉʀʅɲɽɻʏɹʎ ʋʌʉʖʘʌʉʑʆʍʏɿʎɸʌɶɲʍʀɸʎϮΘϯʏʉʐɴɿɴʄʀʉʐʏʉʐʎ͘
Ʌɲʌʉʐʍɿɳɺɸʏɲɿɶɿɲʋʌʙʏɻʔʉʌɳʉɲʄɶʊʌɿɽʅʉʎɷɿɲʀʌɸʍɻʎɲʆɲʄʐʏɿʃɳ;ʍ͘ϭϭϬͿ͘ Ȱɶʃʐʌʉɴʉʄʀɲ
ȳʀʆɸʏɲɿɲʆɳʄʐʍɻʏʉʐɷɿɲɿʌɹʏɻ;ʋ.ʖ͘ϰϴϰрϰсʆʍʃɹʔʏʉʆʏɲɿϰϬϬрϰсϭϬϬ͕ϴϬрϰсϮϬ͕
ϰрϰсϭ͕ɳʌɲϭϬϬнϮϬнϭсϭϮϭ͘Ϳ
ȴɿɲʔʉʌʉʋʉɿɻʅɹʆɻ
ɸʌɶɲʍʀɲʹ
ȵʆɸʌɶɻʏɿʃɼɸʅʋʄʉʃɼ
ʊʄʘʆʏʘʆʅɲɽɻʏʙʆʍɸ
ɲʏʉʅɿʃʊɸʋʀʋɸɷʉ͕ʅɸ
ɴɳʍɻʏʉʆʋʌʉʍʘʋɿʃʊ
ʌʐɽʅʊʃɳɽɸʋɲɿɷɿʉʑ͘
Ɉɲʋɲɿɷɿɳʃɲʄʉʑʆʏɲɿʆɲʄʑʍʉʐʆʊʍʉʏʉɷʐʆɲʏʊʋɸʌɿʍʍʊʏɸʌɸʎɶʌɲʅʅɹʎʏɻʎ
ʅɲɽɻʅɲʏɿʃɼʎʏʌʀʄɿɺɲʎ͕ʉʌɿɺʊʆʏɿɲ͕ʃɳɽɸʏɲʃɲɿɷɿɲɶʙʆɿɲ͕ʅɸʏɻʆʋʌʉʒʋʊɽɸʍɻɻ
ɶʌɲʅʅɼʆɲʋɸʌɳʍɸɿɲʋʊʏʉʃɹʆʏʌʉʊʋʉʐʐʋɳʌʖɸɿɸʌɶɲʍʀɲʋʉʐɸʅʋɸɷʙʆɸɿʏɻ ȴɸʄʏʀʉȵʇʊɷʉʐ
ʆɹɲɶʆʙʍɻ͘ ʅɸʏɻʖʌɼʍɻʏɻʎ
ʏɸʖʆɿʃɼʎʏɻʎʏʌʀʄɿɺɲʎ,
ɻʉʋʉʀɲʋʌʉʍʔɹʌɸɿʏɻ
ɷʐʆɲʏʊʏɻʏɲɸʋɿʄʉɶɼʎ
ɷɿɲɴɲɽʅɿʍʅɹʆʘʆ
ɷʌɲʍʏɻʌɿʉʏɼʏʘʆʹ
ɸʌɶɲʍʀɲʅɸɴɳʍɻʏʉʆ
ʋʌʉʍʘʋɿʃʊʌʐɽʅʊʏʉʐ
ʃɳɽɸʅɲɽɻʏɼ.
77
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 78
4.2. Ενδεικτικός σχεδιασμός διαφοροποίησης της διδασκαλίας στο μάθημα της γλώσσας
Τάξη: E΄
Ενότητα 6
Μάθημα: Ιστορίες με φίλους
Χρόνος: 2 Χ 80΄
Σκοπός: Οι μαθητές να είναι σε θέση να αναφέρουν την αξία της φιλίας ανάμεσα σε όλα
τα παιδιά και ιδιαίτερα στα παιδιά από διαφορετικές εθνότητες και να μπορούν να με-
τατρέπουν τον ευθύ σε πλάγιο λόγο και αντίστροφα.
Προαπαιτούμενες γνώσεις και δεξιότητες:
Οι μαθητές μπορούν:
• Να διαβάζουν και να κατανοούν ένα κείμενο·
• Να αναγνωρίζουν τα εισαγωγικά ως ένδειξη μορφής διαλόγου και άρα ευθέος
λόγου·
• Να αναγνωρίζουν τα μέρη του λόγου: ρήματα, μετοχές·
78
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 79
• Να αναγνωρίζουν τον πλάγιο και ευθύ λόγο και να αναφέρουν τις περιστάσεις στις
οποίες χρησιμοποιείται ο κάθε ένας·
• Να αναγνωρίζουν τους χρόνους των ρημάτων: αόριστος, παρατατικός·
• Να αναγνωρίζουν τον αφηγηματικό λόγο και τα βασικά χαρακτηριστικά του.
Βασικές γνώσεις και δεξιότητες:
Οι μαθητές μπορούν:
• Να μετατρέπουν τον ευθύ λόγο σε πλάγιο και αντίστροφα·
• Να αναφέρουν την αξία χρήσης του ευθέος λόγου σε αφηγηματικό κείμενο·
• Να αναφέρουν τα πλεονεκτήματα που μπορεί να έχει η φιλία ανάμεσα σε δύο
παιδιά·
• Να αναφέρουν τα συναισθήματα τα οποία φαίνονται μέσα από τις πράξεις των
παιδιών·
• Να αναγνωρίζουν ότι η δύναμη της φιλίας είναι πάνω από τις διαφορές που μπο-
ρεί να υπάρχουν ανάμεσα σε εθνότητες.
Μετασχηματιστικές γνώσεις και δεξιότητες:
Οι μαθητές θα έχουν τη δυνατότητα να εργαστούν σε δημιουργικές δραστηριότητες
ανοικτού τύπου, μέσα από τις επιλογές που δίνονται με την τεχνική ΡΑΦΤ . Στις δρα-
στηριότητες οι μαθητές διαπραγματεύονται το θέμα της φιλίας με τη χρήση του ευ-
θέος ή πλάγιου λόγου.
Αξιολόγηση
• Συντρέχουσα, διαμορφωτική κατά την εργασία των μαθητών, μέσα από πολλα-
πλές πηγές (προφορικές και γραπτές εργασίες) κατά τη διάρκεια του μαθήματος
• KWL- Καταγραφή αρχικών γνώσεων για διάγνωση ετοιμότητας των μαθητών
• Γραπτές δραστηριότητες μέσα από την τεχνική ΡΑΦΤ για εφαρμογή, εξάσκηση και
αξιολόγηση των μαθητών σε σχέση με την επίτευξη του σκοπού της διδασκαλίας
• Δελτίο εξόδου
79
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 80
80
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 81
81
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 82
και συναισθημάτων που διακατέχουν τους δύο ήρωες της ιστο- Νοητικό στήριγμα για
ρίας μας. συναισθήματα
(Χαρά, προσμονή, βιασύνη, ………..ευτυχία, ικανοποίηση……. (Παράρτημα 1)
αγωνία, απογοήτευση, θλίψη)
Γραμματικοσυντακτικό φαινόμενο – Ευθύς και πλάγιος λόγος
Ζητάμε από τα παιδιά να βρουν στο κείμενο φράσεις που είναι
σε ευθύ λόγο.
Προβάλλουμε στον πίνακα το κείμενο και ζητάμε από τα παιδιά Επαναφορά προαπαιτού-
να εντοπίσουν τον ευθύ λόγο που υπάρχει στο κείμενο και να μενων γνώσεων
εξηγήσουν πώς τον ξεχώρισαν (με τη χρήση εισαγωγικών). Πώς
βρίσκουμε, συνήθως, τον ευθύ λόγο; (με παύλες)
Κυκλώνουν μία φράση σε πλάγιο λόγο και μία σε ευθύ και δι-
καιολογούν τις επιλογές τους. Αν υπάρχουν μαθητές που δεν Δραστηριότητες εμπλο-
γνωρίζουν τον ευθύ και πλάγιο λόγο, τους μαζεύουμε σε μια κής όλων των μαθητών με
ομάδα και εξηγούμε τις έννοιες αυτές. τη χρήση του κειμένου
Τα παιδιά γράφουν τα ονόματα των ηρώων που μιλούν στον
διάλογο, για να μπορέσουν, στη συνέχεια, να τον μετατρέψουν
σε πλάγιο λόγο (στον διπλανό πίνακα).
Συζητάμε με τα παιδιά ποιος λόγος τους αρέσει περισσότερο
και γιατί; (ευθύς λόγος …προσφέρει ζωντάνια στο κείμενο)
Εργασία βιβλίου 2 για μετατροπή σε πλάγιο λόγο
ΡΑΦΤ: Οι μαθητές που ολοκληρώνουν την εργασία τους προ-
χωρούν και εργάζονται σε μια δραστηριότητα επιλογής τους
από το ΡΑΦΤ.
Ρόλος Ακροατήριο Φόρμα Τίτλος Τεχνική ΡΑΦΤ, δίνονται
στους μαθητές πολλα-
Αφηγητής Αναγνώστες Ιστορία Η συνέχεια της ιστορίας
πλές επιλογές για εργα-
Τσιγγάνα Δημήτρης Επιστολή – Ένα γράμμα που έγρα- σία, στις οποίες μπορούν
ή ή γράμμα ψε ο Δημήτρης στη μι- να χρησιμοποιήσουν τα
Δημήτρης Τσιγγάνα κρή τσιγγάνα ή η τσιγ- διαφορετικά νοητικά στη-
γάνα στον Δημήτρη ρίγματα και οργανωτές,
Αφηγητής Αναγνώστες Ιστορία Η δική μου ιστορία που χρησιμοποιήθηκαν
Συγγραφέας Αναγνώστες Φράσεις για την Πραγματικός φίλος εί- στο μάθημα.
πραγματική φιλία ναι αυτός...
Τσιγγάνα Αναγνώστες Διάλογος Η συνάντηση των παι-
Δημήτρης διών ύστερα από κά-
ποια χρόνια
Δημιουργός Προς όλους Δημιουργική εργα- Η αξία της φιλίας
γός –Πομπός τους σία Αφίσα, ποιή-
μηνύματος αποδέκτες μα, εννοιολογικός
χάρτης
82
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 83
Αξιολόγηση
Στους μαθητές δίνεται διαβαθμισμένο δελτίο εξόδου και όλοι
καλούνται να λύσουν το Α, ενώ όσοι τελειώνουν εργάζονται
και στο Β.
Δελτίο εξόδου Αξιολόγηση με τη χρήση
Συγχαρητήρια μάθατε τόσα πολλά! Λύστε τώρα την Α εργα- διαβαθμισμένου δελτίου
σία και αν υπάρχει αρκετός χρόνος, λύστε και τη Β εξόδου.
83
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 84
Ȱʔɼɶɻʍɻ Ɂɿʙɽʘ͙
9 ɍʙʌʉʎ
Ʌʉʑɷɿɲɷʌɲʅɲʏʀɺʉʆʏɲɿʏɲ
ɶɸɶʉʆʊʏɲʏʉʐʃɸɿʅɹʆʉʐ;
9 ɍʌʊʆʉʎ ʖɲʌɳ
Ʌʊʏɸ͖ʅɹʌɲ͕ʖʌʊʆʉʎ͕ɸʋʉʖɼ͙ ʋʌʉʍʅʉʆɼ
- ɍʌʊʆʉɿʌɻʅɳʏʘʆ ɸʐʏʐʖʀɲ
ɿʃɲʆʉʋʉʀɻʍɻ
9 ȹʌʘɸʎ
Ʌʌʘʏɲɶʘʆɿʍʏɹʎʃɲɿɳʄʄɲ
ɲɶʘʆʀɲ
ʋʌʊʍʘʋɲʋʉʐʍʐʅʅɸʏɹʖʉʐʆ ɲʋʉɶʉɼʏɸʐʍɻ
ɷʐʍʏʐʖʀɲ
9 ȵʇɹʄɿʇɻʏɻʎɿʍʏʉʌʀɲʎ ɽʄʀʗɻ
Ʌʙʎʇɸʃɿʆɳɸɿ͕ʋʙʎʋʌʉʖʘʌɳɸɿʃɲɿ ʍʏɸʆɲʖʙʌɿɲ
ʋʙʎʏɸʄɸɿʙʆɸɿɻɿʍʏʉʌʀɲ;
- Ɇɼʅɲʏɲɷʌɳʍɻʎ- Ɉɿʃɳʆʉʐʆʉɿ ɸʆɽʉʐʍɿɲʍʅʊ
ɼʌʘɸʎ͖ ʐʋɸʌɻʔɳʆɸɿɲ
- ȿɹʇɸɿʎɼʔʌɳʍɸɿʎ ʋʉʐɷɸʀʖʆʉʐʆ ɸʐɶʆʘʅʉʍʑʆɻ
ʏɻʖʌʉʆɿʃɼʍɸɿʌɳ.
- ȿɹʇɸɿʎɼʔʌɳʍɸɿʎ ʋʉʐɷɸʀʖʆʉʐʆ
ɲɶɳʋɻ
ʏɻʆ ɲɿʏʀɲ;ɸʋɸɿɷɼ͕ɷɿʊʏɿʃ͘ɳ͘Ϳ. ɺɼʄɿɲ
ʅʉʆɲʇɿɳ
9 ɇʃɹʗɸɿʎʃɲɿʍʐʆɲɿʍɽɼђɲʏɲ ɹʃʋʄɻʇɻ
ʏʘʆ ɻʌʙʘʆ ʔʊɴʉ
- Ɇɼʅɲʏɲɹʃʔʌɲʍɻʎʍʃɹʗɸʘʆʃɲɿ ɽʐʅʊ
ʍʐʆɲɿʍɽɻʅɳʏʘʆ
Ɉɲʍʐʆɲɿʍɽɼʅɲʏɳʅʉʐ͊
84
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 85
Παράρτημα 2
Διαβαθμισμένη δραστηριότητα: Το βουνό της αφήγησης και των συναισθημάτων
Επίπεδο 1
Τα συναισθήματα του Δημήτρη και της τσιγγάνας
Επίπεδο 2
Τα συναισθήματα του Δημήτρη και της τσιγγάνας
ƳǕnjĴDžķDŽƼLjĶĸĴDžNJ¨ǃĂƾĸNjǃnj
ƭĴĸƼĸǃĵDžƼNjdžĶDžĴĸǃnj
ĴLjĸĴLJLJĴǁƾnjĸǐLjĵǕNjǐLj
ƳǕnjĴDžķDŽƼLjĶĸĴDžǃĸķDžǁǁƼLjĴ
ƫĂDždžNjƾĸķDžǁǁƼLjĴǏƼǎLjĶDžĸNJLj
ƯĶĸƼĸǃLjĴLjĸĴLJLJĴǁƾĸǐLjĵǕNjǐLj
¨ǃĂƾĸNjǃ, ǁDžĴLjĴĸNJǍĵǕķĶDžĸNJĵǕNjNJ.
ƧLjĴǎǕNjǃķǃĸǃnjĂDždžNjƾnjĸķDžǁǁƼLjĴnj
85
2_GREEK_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 07:35 86
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:50 87
Espan
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:50 88
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:50 89
89
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:50 90
^dZd'/^E^HE/sZ^/&/
E^/^WZE/:
;KEK/D/EdK͕WZWZ/ME͕WZ&/>WZE/:͕^d/>KWZE/:Ϳ
Diagrama 1: Ilustración del modelo de Tomlinson de enseñanza diversificada (1995, 2000; 2001)
Durante los últimos diez años, la enseñanza diversificada ha ido obteniendo cada vez más
atención como práctica docente innovadora que puede hacer frente a los retos del aula ac-
tual. Aunque varios investigadores la consideran desde otro punto de vista, todos están de
acuerdo en que la ED es la forma de responder a la variedad que necesita el alumnado.
• Una enseñanza que el docente planifica proactivamente de manera que sea lo bas-
tante sólida para dirigirse a las distintas necesidades del alumnado, a diferencia de
planificar un único método para todos y tratar reactivamente de ajustar los planes
cuando se observa que la clase no funciona con algunos de los alumnos para la que es-
taba prevista (Tomlinson, 2001).
• Un método de enseñar y aprender para alumnos con distintas capacidades en la misma
aula (Hall, Strangman y Meyer, 2002).
• Una formación que exige un esfuerzo más consciente para analizar datos variables y
tomar decisiones sobre qué es lo que funciona y qué es lo que debe ajustarse (Gregory
y Chapman, 2007).
• La diversificación de la enseñanza y el aprendizaje es el reto actual al que se enfren-
tan los docentes a la hora de desarrollar el currículo en el aula. Sin embargo, los do-
centes no pueden diversificar el rendimiento de los alumnos si no utilizan, al mismo
tiempo, procesos de enseñanza diversificados para la construcción de imágenes y la
emancipación, lo que podría equilibrar las desigualdades sociales. (Koutselini y Aga-
thagelou, 2009).
• Una enseñanza que pueda ser impartida por los docentes en función de lo que estos
saben sobre las preferencias de aprendizaje de los alumnos (es decir, inteligencia, talen-
tos, estilos de aprendizaje) y que permita a los alumnos elegir entre trabajar de manera
independiente, con compañeros o en equipo, o que ofrezca espacios de trabajo diversos
90
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:50 91
que contribuyan a las distintas preferencias de aprendizaje (es decir, espacios de trabajo
en silencio, espacios de trabajo con mesas en lugar de pupitres) (Ireh e Ibeneme, 2010)
• Una opción interesante para utilizarla también en aulas normales, donde el aprendi-
zaje ha pasado a estar orientado hacia el alumno y a ser colaborativo y donde todos
los alumnos reciben estímulos adecuados y pertinentes (Smit y Humpert, 2012).
• Un modelo de diseño de la enseñanza […] que garantiza un aprendizaje eficaz para
personas distintas y que se lleva a cabo a través de un currículo bien diseñado y de
una enseñanza centrada en el alumno que se acopla a las diferencias en la disposición
(conocimientos, comprensión y capacidades del alumno con respecto a una secuen-
cia de aprendizaje concreta), el interés (temas que provocan curiosidad y pasión en un
alumno) y perfil de aprendizaje (manera en que un alumno aprende mejor, con res-
pecto a su estilo de aprendizaje, inteligencia, cultura y sexo) de los alumnos (Maeng y
Bell, 2015).
• Enseñanza y aprendizaje que aspiran a crear una correspondencia entre las tareas y ac-
tividades, por un lado, y las necesidades de cada alumno, por otro, a fin de maximizar
el crecimiento del alumnado (De Neve, Devos y Tuytens, 2015).
• En el contexto de la enseñanza diversificada, la equidad es la oportunidad que tienen
todos los grupos de alumnos de un aula de capacidades mixtas para cumplir al máximo
los objetivos del currículo, de acuerdo con sus habilidades y competencias personales,
lo que garantiza un acceso igual al conocimiento para todos. (Valiandes, 2015).
Cabe señalar que la diversificación no queda a criterio de cada docente. Un método de di-
versificación basado en los derechos (Neophytou y Valiandes, 2017b) […] «implica reconocer
que los niños no son ciudadanos en espera, sino individuos que ahora ya ostentan derechos,
como el de tener voz en la toma de decisiones que les afectan. También implica aplicar la re-
flexión crítica y reconsiderar conceptos muy arraigados sobre el papel del docente y el del
alumnado en el proceso de enseñanza y de aprendizaje» (Unicef, 2012, p. 11). Por lo tanto, no
es una cuestión de caridad ni queda a criterio del docente diversificar su enseñanza. Es obli-
gación del Estado y del docente proteger los derechos de todos los niños que asistan a un aula
de capacidades mixtas. Con este fin, la diversificación parece ser la manera óptima, hasta la
fecha, de lograrlo.
Con el paso de los años ha ido aumentando el corpus de investigaciones relativas a nu-
merosos aspectos de la ED. Durante los últimos cinco años, ha habido muchas investigacio-
nes que señalan la eficacia de la enseñanza diversificada en distintos entornos educativos y
asignaturas (Aliakbari y Haghighi, 2014; Joseph, Thomas, Simonette y Ramscook, 2013; Lan-
drum y McDuffie, 2010; Reis, McCoach, Little, Muller y Kaniskan, 2011; Simpkins, Mastro-
pieri, Scruggs, 2009; Valiandes, 2015). Para resumir, se puede decir que la enseñanza
diversificada está reconocida como método de control para acortar las distancias entre los lo-
gros de los alumnos (Bellman, Foshay,& Gremillion, 2014; Valiandes, 2015).
A pesar de todos los estudios que resaltan las ventajas de la enseñanza diversificada, sur-
gen voces críticas, debido, sobre todo, a ideas equivocadas habituales sobre la enseñanza di-
versificada:
• La suposición de que los alumnos señalados como con “disposición menos desarro-
llada” necesitan más enseñanza directa y práctica rutinaria, en detrimento de méto-
dos pedagógicos que partan de la consulta (Bannister, 2016)
• Si los docentes diversifican la enseñanza, crean capacidades injustas entre los alum-
nos (Rock et al., 2008)
91
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:50 92
92
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:50 93
car la diversificación. Dado que la ED es un proceso único para cada docente en cada aula, los
docentes deben ser siempre conscientes de a quién van a enseñar y qué necesitan y pueden
estudiar sus alumnos.
En consecuencia, antes de diseñar una clase, el docente debe valorar a sus alumnos y
tener en cuenta su nivel de preparación, perfil de aprendizaje y necesidades e intereses emo-
cionales y sociales. Aunque en la mayoría de aulas de capacidades mixtas puede haber hasta
cinco niveles de preparación, a efectos de planificar y aplicar la diversificación se puede agru-
par a los alumnos en tres niveles: a) los que están por debajo de la media del aula, b) los que
están cerca de la media del aula y c) los que están muy por encima de la media del aula. Estos
grupos no se comunican al alumnado, sino que se utilizan, por parte del docente, para dise-
ñar actividades en consecuencia, a fin de ofrecer a todos la oportunidad de trabajar y apren-
der.
Los conocimientos científicos del docente respecto de la disciplina de su enseñanza y/o el
asunto del tema curricular/de enseñanza orientan la definición del fin y los objetivos de la clase.
El elemento básico de la enseñanza diversificada consiste en identificar y establecer los cono-
cimientos principales básicos, ya que, de este modo, se garantiza el logro de todos los objeti-
vos, actividades y metas de evaluación. Seguidamente, en función de estos conocimientos
básicos principales (conocimientos nuevos), deben definirse con claridad los conocimientos
previos necesarios (conocimientos imprescindibles para poder adquirir los conocimientos bá-
sicos) y los conocimientos transformativos (aquellos que trascienden los básicos y los previos
necesarios). Los conocimientos transformativos están dirigidos, sobre todo, a los alumnos que
vayan más avanzados que el grupo objetivo principal, según se define en el currículo (puede re-
ferirse incluso a los alumnos dotados) (Koutselini, 2006, p. 87) (Diagrama 2).
FIN DE LA CLASE
&/E/Z>DdKK>K'1ʹ d/s/^zKZ'E//ME
DEL AULA
93
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 94
94
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 95
95
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 96
2.1.4. Diseño de la clase de Enseñanza Diversificada, del trabajo del alumnado y del apren-
dizaje
De acuerdo con lo anterior, los docentes deben decidir qué técnicas y estrategias de en-
señanza pueden utilizar para asegurarse de que todos los alumnos participen en el proceso
de aprendizaje y trabajen en la tarea, a fin de que adquieran los conocimientos y capacida-
des fundamentales básicos. También deben tener en cuenta que, aunque hayan diseñado su
tipo de enseñanza, deben poder modificarlo y ajustarlo dinámicamente en función de las re-
acciones del alumnado.
El primer paso de la enseñanza diversificada consiste en diseñar actividades con un orden
jerárquico, partiendo de las que se utilizan para comprobar los conocimientos previos nece-
sarios y luego avanzando a los que introducen los nuevos conocimientos. Además, las activi-
dades jerárquicas se refieren a la planificación de actividades, de lo sencillo a lo complejo y
de lo convergente a lo divergente.
96
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 97
Como se muestra claramente en el Diagrama 3, las dos primeras actividades requieren que
los alumnos trabajen y recuperen sus conocimientos anteriores, requisito previo para que se
les puedan presentar los nuevos conocimientos. Las actividades de esta fase de la enseñanza
son, sobre todo, actividades abiertas, pequeñas investigaciones, sesiones de aporte de ideas
o fichas de entrada, que exigen muy poco tiempo y que el docente puede evaluar con facilidad.
Al dar énfasis a los conocimientos previos necesarios que deben adquirir todos los alum-
nos, mediante una evaluación formativa sistemática, el docente ofrece a los alumnos cuyo
rendimiento esté por debajo de la media la oportunidad de trabajar a su propio ritmo con o
sin ayuda (es decir, puntales cognitivos), al tiempo que ofrece a los más adelantados la opor-
tunidad de avanzar y usar estos conocimientos en problemas más complejos. Los docentes
con poca práctica en la implantación de la ED suelen señalar que este proceso les ha llevado
tiempo, sobre todo al principio, ya que había muchos conocimientos previos necesarios que
los alumnos debían adquirir. Había que dedicar tiempo a explicar de nuevo o a corregir ma-
lentendidos. Una vez hecho esto, los alumnos adquirían los conocimientos principales y, así,
podían trabajar más eficazmente en cualquier conocimiento nuevo. Ello demuestra que los
docentes deben diseñar y ayudar a construir nuevos conocimientos con paciencia en lugar de
limitarse a enseñar lo que se indica en el currículo, ya que la adquisición de nuevos conoci-
mientos debe basarse, fundamentalmente, en conocimientos previos.
Además, al diseñar la enseñanza de un modo jerárquico, el docente puede ajustar diná-
micamente las actividades y el tiempo que necesitan los alumnos para trabajar en activida-
des concretas, mediante la observación del trabajo de estos conforme va evolucionando el
97
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 98
proceso de aprendizaje. En la práctica, esto significa que los alumnos tienen la oportunidad
de trabajar según su propio ritmo de trabajo y aprendizaje y, así, no tienen que seguir el ritmo
de la clase «normal». Aunque todos los alumnos pueden empezar la clase en la misma acti-
vidad, después cada uno trabaja a su propio ritmo mientras el docente supervisa, ayuda y co-
ordina todo el trabajo que se hace en el aula.
Otra característica importante de la enseñanza diversificada es la clasificación de una ac-
tividad en términos de su complejidad y el trabajo intelectual necesario. La clasificación de
actividades puede llevarse a cabo de acuerdo con los conocimientos/capacidades que se es-
pera que adquiera el alumnado. Por lo tanto, todos los alumnos deben ser capaces de apli-
car sus capacidades de análisis y redacción, aunque algunos lo harán en un nivel más sencillo
y otros, en un nivel más complejo (Neophytou y Valiandes, 2015; Valiandes, 2013). Cuando
hablamos de la clasificación de las actividades, nos referimos, básicamente, a la «diversifi-
cación horizontal», que permite a todos los alumnos trabajar para adquirir los mismos co-
nocimientos/capacidades a través de actividades que se clasifican o categorizan en niveles en
función de su dificultad, composición y complejidad. Casi siempre, estas actividades clasifi-
cadas engloban la misma actividad, más simplificada y menos exigente para alumnos más
flojos o más estimulante y compleja para alumnos más avanzados. Estas actividades también
se conocen como actividades en niveles.
Debe quedar claro que no se debe excluir a ningún alumno de las actividades más com-
plejas. Al contrario, de acuerdo con una observación y evaluación continua del trabajo del
alumnado, los docentes deben ajustar dinámicamente las actividades para que sean acordes
con los niveles de preparación de los alumnos en un momento determinado. Conforme me-
jora el rendimiento de un alumno, este puede recibir tareas más estimulantes, mientras que,
si un alumno que se creía más avanzado parece estar quedándose atrás en cuanto a deter-
minadas capacidades básicas, el docente debe estar preparado para ayudarle asignándole
tareas de aprendizaje adecuadas, incluso más sencillas (Neophytou y Valiandes, 2015). La di-
versificación, por lo tanto, es un proceso dinámico que se basa en una planificación flexible
(Orlich, Harder, Callahan, Trevisan, & Brown, 2012; Tomlinson, 2001).
En la planificación de la docencia deben incluirse actividades que garanticen una mayor
comprensión por parte de los alumnos y les ayuden a practicar lo que se les ha enseñado o
incluso transformen sus conocimientos. Estas actividades han de presentarse durante la en-
señanza en forma de actividades de anclaje. El objetivo de estas actividades consiste en ma-
ximizar la participación de los alumnos en las actividades que tengan un auténtico valor y
sentido de aprendizaje.
Además, el docente proporciona los medios y el material que los alumnos necesitan y
controla qué alumno tiene acceso a qué material o medio, a fin de no desperdiciar un tiempo
lectivo valioso ni interrumpir la marcha de la clase. Los alumnos deben familiarizarse con las
rutinas de trabajo y uso de materiales disponibles en el aula. Es esencial que los alumnos es-
tablezcan individualmente la rutina de trabajo con sus compañeros o grupo y el trabajo con
toda el aula (Diagrama 3; Valiandes, 2014). Asimismo, deben ser capaces de usar los medios
disponibles para apoyar su estilo de aprendizaje. Algunas de estas rutinas esenciales son: es-
cribir en cuadernos, utilizar programas informáticos, recuperar apoyos mentales, usar con
eficacia los materiales de ayuda al aprendizaje, material matemático, etc.
El apoyo cognitivo desempeña un papel importante en la aplicación de la diversificación.
Los puntales cognitivos pueden ayudar a los alumnos a recuperar los conocimientos previos
98
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 99
99
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 100
100
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 101
de los alumnos pueden trabajar a su propio ritmo sin verse arrastrados ni frenados para en-
cajar en un marco de actividades y un horario inflexibles y predefinidos. Dado que los alum-
nos trabajan y aprenden a su propio ritmo, los docentes deben diseñar e implantar planes de
clase que ofrezcan la oportunidad de llevar a cabo un trabajo individual que fomente el des-
arrollo de una zona de confort personal para el aprendizaje. Al trabajar individualmente, los
alumnos pueden avanzar y pasar a la siguiente actividad de acuerdo con el plan de clase je-
rárquico y, así, trabajar de forma asíncrona, lo que hace que se diferencien de sus compañe-
ros. Gracias al trabajo asíncrono, los alumnos menos destacados y que aprenden más
lentamente tienen más tiempo para trabajar y aprender los conocimientos y capacidades
básicos, mientras que los más destacados y que aprenden con más rapidez pueden seguir
avanzando, desarrollar y mejorar aún más su aprendizaje y capacidades (Neophytou y Va-
liandes, 2015; Valiandes, 2013; Valiandes y Neophytou, 2017b). De este modo, se satisfacen
las necesidades de todos los alumnos y estos se alegran de trabajar en actividades que les re-
sultan pertinentes y estimulantes. Al trazar una imagen de la enseñanza diversificada, el tra-
bajo individual de los alumnos que permite su trabajo y aprendizaje asíncronos ha de formar
parte de la rutina básica, según la cual el trabajo individual viene seguido del trabajo coope-
rativo y el trabajo de toda el aula.
101
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 102
Fases de implantación
• Desarrollo de la tarea del nivel real, de acuerdo con lo esperado en el currículo
• Ajuste de la tarea para crear una tarea de nivel inferior destinada a alumnos con difi-
cultades
• Ajuste de la tarea para crear una tarea de nivel superior destinada a alumnos avanza-
dos
Técnicas en el aula
Para alumnos con dificultades
• Nivel: proporcionar lecturas/materiales más accesibles (nivel, vocabulario, formato,
etc.) sobre el mismo tema; utilizar lecturas grabadas.
• Estructura: proporcionar textos seleccionados; utilizar diagramas de flujo para dirigir
la lectura y la resolución de problemas.
• Complejidad: simplificar la complejidad de una tarea facilitando elementos de ayuda
(directrices, puntales de aprendizaje, etc.) que los guíen a lo largo de los distintos pasos
necesarios para alcanzar el objetivo establecido como mínimo para todos los alumnos
del aula.
Para alumnos avanzados
• Nivel: proporcionar lecturas/materiales más avanzados (nivel, vocabulario, formato,
etc.) sobre el mismo tema.
• Ritmo: pedir a los alumnos que estudien la información sobre el autor/inventor o un
artículo/problema similar y que busquen conexiones/patrones.
• Creatividad: ofrecer tareas más abiertas; dejar espacio a los alumnos para que expe-
rimenten con distintas opciones y lleguen así a un objetivo claramente especificado (el
mismo que para el resto de la clase).
• Complejidad: aumentar el nivel de complejidad de una tarea.
102
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 103
103
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 104
Todos los estudiantes usan los mismos materiales, pero lo que deben hacer con esos mate-
riales es diferente.
Ejemplo: Bloques lógicos
Nivel uno: Identifica todas las formas en las que puedes agrupar los bloques lógicos.
Nivel dos: Identifica todos los patrones diferentes que puedes hacer con tus bloques lógicos.
Nivel tres: Crea un gráfico de barras para mostrar los diferentes tipos de bloques lógicos
que tienes.
Ejemplo 4: Actividad en niveles: escribir una redacción persuasiva Aula de 4.º-6.º curso
(Heacox, 2002)
Inicial Intermedio Avanzado
Resultado/objetivo Los alumnos deciden Los alumnos Los alumnos
un tema y escriben deciden un deciden un tema,
un párrafo de cinco tema, expresan expresan un punto
frases con una idea un punto de vista de vista y escriben
principal, tres frases y escriben dos una redacción de,
que la sustenten y párrafos para al menos, cinco
una frase de defender ese párrafos en la que
conclusión. punto de vista. se usen varias
fuentes para
defender dicho
punto de vista.
Indicación/actividad Los alumnos reciben Los alumnos Los alumnos revisan
un modelo de párrafo reciben un modelo el diagrama de flujo
de cinco frases y la de redacción de una redacción
indicación explícita de persuasiva y un persuasiva. Reciben
104
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 105
105
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 106
vidades de anclaje consiste en aportar a los alumnos un trabajo relevante para cuando ter-
minan una tarea o proyecto. Proporcionan tareas continuas vinculadas al contenido (están-
dar) y al marco educativo general. Además, las actividades de anclaje permiten desarrollar
entre el alumnado estrategias de trabajo en grupo independiente, lo que libera al docente
para trabajar con otros alumnos o grupos de alumnos.
Fases de implantación
1. Creación de las actividades: para empezar, crear actividades concretas o un grupo de
actividades que coincidan con el área de contenidos y que se vayan a utilizar en fases
concretas de la clase; pueden variar según los distintos niveles de capacidades, así
como según los intereses.
2. Presentación de las actividades: una vez creadas las actividades, presentar al alum-
nado el concepto de actividades de anclaje; describir las expectativas, las tareas y el
tiempo conveniente para trabajar con las actividades.
3. Evaluación: puede llevarse a cabo durante la clase y mediante reuniones alumno-do-
cente, criterios del docente y pacto con los alumnos.
Técnicas en el aula
• Utilización en cualquier asignatura
• Tareas individuales o en grupos pequeños
• En niveles, para satisfacer las necesidades de los distintos grados de preparación
• Interdisciplinares, para su uso en distintas áreas de contenido o equipos
106
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 107
agrupar a los alumnos de un modo más flexible. Se puede llevar a cabo en forma de agrupa-
ción de toda la clase, creación de un grupo pequeño en la clase o agrupación de los alumnos
con un compañero. El agrupamiento flexible crea grupos temporales que pueden durar una
hora o una semana. Los grupos pueden variar de una asignatura a otra o de una clase a otra,
ya que se crean en función de distintos criterios según la clase, las actividades y las necesi-
dades de que se trate en cada caso. En este sentido, los grupos no son permanentes y el
agrupamiento flexible es una manera temporal de que los alumnos trabajen juntos en una
diversidad de formas y configuraciones. Para que la enseñanza diversificada pueda llevarse
a cabo con éxito mediante el agrupamiento flexible, los docentes deben tener en cuenta los
perfiles de aprendizaje de los alumnos, sus intereses, sus capacidades sociales y de colabo-
ración y sus niveles de preparación. A fin de fomentar el máximo aprendizaje y establecer una
ética de colaboración en el seno de los distintos grupos, los alumnos deben ir cambiando fre-
cuentemente de un grupo a otro en función de sus necesidades concretas.
Fases de implantación
1. Preguntarse: «¿Cuál es la mejor configuración para cumplir mi objetivo didáctico en
esta actividad?». Decidir entre un grupo dirigido por el docente (toda la clase, un grupo
pequeño o una actividad individual dirigida por el docente) y un grupo dirigido por el
alumno (colaborativo, según el rendimiento o en parejas).
2. Evaluar todos los datos de valoración y repasar los perfiles de aprendizaje del alum-
nado para facilitar la formación de los grupos.
3. Determinar el diseño de agrupamientos más eficaz. Por ejemplo, agrupar a los alum-
nos por género, grupo anterior, elección de los alumnos o elección del docente.
Técnicas en el aula
• Crear un sistema codificado por colores o un gráfico que ayude al docente y a los alum-
nos a saber a qué grupo(s) pertenecen estos.
• Dar instrucciones específicas sobre las tareas que deben llevar a cabo los grupos.
• Colgar en el tablón de anuncios del aula las instrucciones y expectativas concretas, por
escrito, para no tener que repetirlas.
• Diseñar y practicar rutinas y procedimientos para entrar y salir de los grupos. Elaborar
una rutina para que el aula no se suma en un «caos absoluto» una vez finalizada una
tarea en grupo.
• Establecer un plazo concreto para que los alumnos terminen su trabajo en grupo. Lo
mejor es fijar una alarma para que los alumnos sepan que, cuando suena dicha alarma,
deben continuar tranquilamente con la siguiente actividad.
• Implantar entre los alumnos un registro de aprendizaje por cada grupo al que perte-
nezcan. La codificación por colores es la que mejor funciona para que los alumnos lle-
ven un registro de lo que van haciendo en cada grupo.
107
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 108
diante el cual los alumnos pueden sustituir el contenido que ya hayan asimilado plenamente
por contenido que les resulte más estimulante y motivador. Los alumnos dedican un tiempo
al contenido del nivel de su curso y un tiempo a contenido más estimulante (Reis, Burns &
Renzulli 1992). De esta forma, todos se ven estimulados, siguen aprendiendo información y
capacidades importantes y pueden avanzar en el colegio. Para aplicar la compactación en el
aula, es necesario definir, en primer lugar, los objetivos de una unidad o punto de aprendi-
zaje concretos. A continuación, hay que detectar las competencias, capacidades o contenido
que ya domina el alumno. Por último, estos elementos se sustituyen por nuevas situaciones
o experiencias que puedan proporcionar al alumno la oportunidad de hacer un uso más pro-
ductivo y enriquecedor del tiempo que pasa en el centro.
Fases de implantación
1. Determinar los fines y objetivos de un área o asignatura concreta.
2. Decidir qué alumnos incluir en la evaluación.
3. Evaluar la competencia de los alumnos en un área concreta.
4. Proponer alternativas que esos alumnos encuentren más estimulantes.
5. Preparar una guía de programación didáctica individual que incluya lo siguiente:
- ÁREAS DEL CURRÍCULO QUE CONSIDERAR PARA SU COMPACTACIÓN Proporcionar
una breve descripción del material básico que se tratará durante este periodo de
evaluación y la información de valoración o pruebas que sugieran la necesidad de
compactación.
- PROCEDIMIENTOS PARA COMPACTAR MATERIAL BÁSICO Describir las actividades
que se usarán para garantizar la competencia en áreas curriculares básicas.
- ACTIVIDADES DE ACELERACIÓN Y/O ENRIQUECIMIENTO Describir las actividades
que se usarán para proporcionar actividades de aprendizaje de nivel avanzado en
cada área del currículo normal.
Técnicas en el aula
• Tutoría entre compañeros (como alternativa, el alumno puede ser tutor de otros alum-
nos del aula)
• Aprendizaje cooperativo
• Trabajo autónomo (individual o con un compañero), investigación y propuesta de so-
luciones a un problema relacionado con el contenido objeto de estudio (participación
en actividades que ayuden a la comunidad)
• Entrega a los alumnos de directrices de evaluación (criterios) para que puedan valorar
sus avances de aprendizaje a lo largo de una unidad determinada
108
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:51 109
Las fichas de entrada ayudan a los alumnos a reflexionar sobre lo que saben, al trabajar
y recordar los conocimientos previos necesarios para trabajar y adquirir nuevos conoci-
mientos. Son muy útiles para identificar las ideas equivocadas o dificultades de los alumnos
con respecto a los conocimientos previos necesarios. Esta información permite al docente
adaptar la enseñanza a fin de corregir ideas equivocadas y ofrecer al alumnado la oportuni-
dad de trabajar y aprender los conocimientos previos necesarios. Por supuesto, este no es
siempre el caso, ya que no todos los alumnos pueden adquirir estos conocimientos en tan
breve espacio de tiempo. En estos casos, deben usarse puntales de aprendizaje para ayudar
al alumnado a trabajar y aprender.
109
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 110
• Los alumnos pueden escribir las respuestas en su cuaderno, en una nota adhesiva, en
un papel en blanco o en un formulario facilitado por el docente.
• Los alumnos que terminen su ficha de entrada pueden comprobar su trabajo con los
compañeros que tengan al lado o en su grupo.
• El docente revisa el trabajo de los alumnos conforme estos trabajan y selecciona in-
formación según su nivel de conocimientos y comprensión del tema de que se trate.
• Por lo general, el docente no recoge las fichas de entrada, aunque puede hacerlo en
caso de que desee estudiarlas para obtener más información sobre el trabajo indivi-
dual del alumno.
Ficha de entrada
Escoge y lleva a cabo una de las siguientes actividades:
1. Escribe unas cuantas palabras (o frases) que se te ocurran cuando oyes la pala-
bra «Paleolítico».
2. ƐĐƌŝďĞůĂƐĐĂƌĂĐƚĞƌşƐƚŝĐĂƐƉƌŝŶĐŝƉĂůĞƐ;ĄŶŐƵůŽƐ͕ůĂĚŽƐͿĚĞĐĂĚĂĨŽƌŵĂ͘
Las fichas de salida ayudan a los alumnos a reflexionar sobre lo que han aprendido y el nivel
en el que pueden usar estos nuevos conocimientos y/o capacidades. Esta información orien-
tará al docente para diseñar la siguiente clase sobre el tema, teniendo en cuenta lo que ya
se ha aprendido y lo que debe revisarse o repetirse para corregir todas las ideas equivocadas.
110
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 111
Las fichas de salida son excelentes, porque el docente tarda solo unos minutos en preparar-
las y los alumnos pueden completarlas muy rápidamente.
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
Nombre ______________________________________ Clase_________
111
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 112
FICHA DE SALIDA 3, 2, 1
EŽŵďƌĞ͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͗ &ĞĐŚĂ͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͗
EsĐƌŝďĞ͙
ϯĐŽƐĂƐƋƵĞŚĂLJĂƐĂƉƌĞŶĚŝĚŽŚŽLJLJĐſŵŽǀĂƐĂƵƐĂƌůĂƐ͗
3 __________________________________________________________________
2 ___________________________________________________________________
1 ___________________________________________________________________
ϮĐŽƐĂƐƐŽďƌĞůĂƐƋƵĞƚĞŐƵƐƚĂƌşĂƐĂďĞƌŵĄƐ͗
2 __________________________________________________________________
1 ___________________________________________________________________
1. ___________________________________________________________________
112
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 113
Rol del autor: ¿Quién o qué eres, como autor? (un presidente, un juguete, un personaje de-
terminado) ¿Cuál es tu papel en la historia? ¿Cómo afectaría ese papel a tu escritura?
Audiencia: ¿Para quién estás escribiendo? (un compañero de clase, un profesor, los lectores
de un periódico) ¿Cuál es el lenguaje apropiado que debes usar al dirigirte a ese público con-
creto?
Formato: ¿En qué formato vas a escribir? (una carta, un poema, un discurso)
Tema y verbo fuerte: ¿Sobre qué vas a escribir? ¿Por qué? ¿Cuál es el tema o el propósito?
Fases de implantación
1. Determinar los objetivos de aprendizaje de la clase/unidad.
2. Usar datos de evaluación y perfiles del alumnado para determinar la preparación, los
estilos de aprendizaje o los intereses de los alumnos.
3. Diseñar distintas tareas de escritura determinando el rol del autor, la audiencia, el for-
mato y el tema del texto.
4. Disponer las tareas en un panel de opciones RAFT.
5. Comprobar lo siguiente:
- ¿El sistema RAFT es atractivo para distintos estilos de aprendizaje?
- ¿Existe un rango de dificultad en los roles, formatos y niveles de preparación?
- ¿Los roles, formatos o temas son atractivos para distintos intereses del alumnado?
Técnicas en el aula
RAFT es una estrategia que puede usarse de varias formas para satisfacer las necesidades
de todos los alumnos, según dónde estén y cuáles sean sus necesidades conocidas. Posibles
ideas para un RAFT:
personajes de un cuento, personajes históricos, profesiones, términos clave, científicos o
políticos, instrumentos musicales, enfermedades, accidentes geográficos, vocabulario, per-
sonajes de dibujos animados, tipos de tejido, compositores o artistas, instrumentos o herra-
mientas, formas o colores, autores o inventores, empresarios o industriales, minerales o
elementos químicos, ciudades, países o continentes, términos técnicos, etc.
También puede usarse en las clases de matemáticas.
113
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 114
Fases de implantación
1. Determinar los resultados y el enfoque educativo de una unidad didáctica.
2. Usar datos de evaluación y perfiles del alumnado para determinar la preparación, los
estilos de aprendizaje o los intereses de los alumnos.
3. Diseñar nueve tareas distintas en función de los conocimientos/capacidades que los
alumnos deben trabajar.
4. Disponer las tareas en un panel de opciones y colocar en el centro del tablero la tarea
que todos los alumnos deben llevar a cabo.
5. A continuación, los alumnos eligen y llevan a cabo tres tareas, una de las cuales debe
ser la del recuadro central. Las tres tareas deben estar alineadas.
6. Los alumnos que completen una raya pueden seguir e intentar llevar a cabo más acti-
vidades y, así, completar más rayas.
114
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 115
Técnicas en el aula
• Dejar que los alumnos completen tres tareas cualesquiera, incluso aunque no estén ali-
neadas.
• Crear distintos paneles de opciones según la preparación. (Los alumnos con dificulta-
des trabajan con las opciones de un panel, mientras que los más avanzados tienen dis-
tintas opciones).
• Crear distintos paneles de opciones según estilos o preferencias de aprendizaje. Por
ejemplo, un panel de opciones podría incluir tres tareas cenestésicas, tres tareas au-
ditivas y tres tareas visuales.
• Crear un panel de opciones con más de nueve opciones (p. ej., dieciséis).
• En lugar de pedir que los alumnos lleven a cabo las tareas para formar una raya, pe-
dirles que lo hagan para dibujar/colorear un determinado patrón dentro de la cuadrí-
cula de 3 × 3; p. ej.:
115
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 116
116
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 117
El segundo ejemplo es un plan de lección sobre la biografía, en la que se trabajan los tex-
tos informativos y descriptivos, dirigido a quinto curso de Educación Primaria. Este ejemplo
se basa en el currículo español y desarrolla contenidos y competencias del área de Lengua cas-
tellana y literatura.
117
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 118
WƌŽĐĞĚŝŵŝĞŶƚŽƉĂƌĂůĂůĞĐĐŝſŶ ŝĨĞƌĞŶĐŝĂĐŝſŶ
Rutina de trabajo
Punto de partida ʹ Restablecimiento de conocimientos previos Trabajo individual-trabajo
dŽĚŽƐůŽƐŶŝŹŽƐƌĞĐŝďĞŶƵŶĂƚĂƌũĞƚĂĚĞĞŶƚƌĂĚĂƉĂƌĂƉŽĚĞƌƉĂƌƚŝĐŝƉĂƌĞŶĞůǀŝĂũĞ
colaborativo; grupo-clase
ŵĂƚĞŵĄƚŝĐŽƋƵĞĞƐƚĄĂƉƵŶƚŽĚĞĐŽŵĞŶnjĂƌ͘ĞďĞŶƌĞƐŽůǀĞƌƌĄƉŝĚĂŵente tantas
multiplicaciones (x10, x 1 00, x 1000) y divisiones como puedan. Los estudiantes
ƚƌĂďĂũĂŶŝŶĚŝǀŝĚƵĂůŵĞŶƚĞLJůƵĞŐŽĐŽŵƉĂƌĂŶƐƵƚƌĂďĂũŽĐŽŶĞůĚĞůŽƐĐŽŵƉĂŹĞƌŽƐ͘
ůŵĂĞƐƚƌŽĞƐƚĂƌĄĐŽŶƐƚĂŶƚĞŵĞŶƚĞŵŽǀŝĠŶĚŽƐĞƉŽƌĞůĂƵůĂ͕ƐƵƉĞƌǀŝƐĂŶĚŽůĂƚĂƌĞĂ
y ayudando a los alumnos en lo que se precise. Tarjeta de entrada
ǀĂůƵĂĐŝſŶĚĞů
RESOLVER LAS OPERACIONES NES PARA GANAR UN BILLETE conocimiento previo de
3DUDFRQVHJXLUHOELOOHWHSDUDVXSUy[LPRYLDMHPDWHPiWLFR los alumnos
debe resolver las siguientes ecuaciones: Actividad abierta para
5 x 10 ««« 420 ¸ 70 «« motivar a los estudiantes y
5 x 100 «« 350 ¸ «« ƉƌŽƉŝĐŝĂƌƐƵŝŶǀŽůƵĐƌĂĐŝſŶ
6400 ¸ 80 ««« 484 ¸ 4 «« en el proceso de
70 x 80 «« ¸ «« aprendizaje.
Trabajo individual-trabajo
colaborativo; grupo-clase
3X6=18
ϭϴрϯсϲ
Se les pide a los estudiantes que expliquen
ϭϴрϲсϯ
ĐſŵŽƌĞĂůŝnjĂƌĄŶůĂĚŝǀŝƐŝſŶϯϵϲрϯс͘͘͘͘͘͘͘
Cada estudiante puede usar su cuaderno,
cubos y/o su marcador. 6X16 = 6 X (10+6)
= (6X10)+(6x6)
= 60 + 36
= 96
^ĞŝŶƐƚĂĂůŽƐĞƐƚƵĚŝĂŶƚĞƐŵĄƐĐĂƉĂĐĞƐĂĞdžƉůŝĐĂƌĂůƌĞƐƚŽĚĞůŐƌƵƉŽĐſŵŽƐĞĚĞďĞ
sĞƌďĂůŝnjĂĐŝſŶĚĞů
ƉƌŽĐĞĚĞƌƉĂƌĂƌĞƐŽůǀĞƌĞůƉƌŽďůĞŵĂ͕ƉƌĂĐƚŝĐĂŶĚŽĂƐşƐƵƐŚĂďŝůŝĚĂĚĞƐŵĞƚĂĐŽŐŶŝƚŝǀĂƐ pensamiento
ĚĞƐĚĞĞůĐŽŵŝĞŶnjŽĚĞůĂůĞĐĐŝſŶ͘
118
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 119
^ĞůĞƐƉŝĚĞĂůŽƐŶŝŹŽƐƋƵĞƚƌĂďĂũĞŶ͕ĚĞƐĚĞůĂƉĞƌƐƉĞĐƚŝǀĂĚĞůĂĞŶƐĞŹĂŶnjĂ /ŶǀŽůƵĐƌĂĐŝſŶĚĞůŽƐ
diversificada, la actividad anterior, en la que no se ofrecen divisiones exactas. Por estudiantes de manera
ĞũĞŵƉůŽ͕ϰϭϮрϯБdžŽϭϴϵрϵБdž͘^ĞĚĂƌĄŝŵƉŽƌƚĂŶĐŝĂĂůĂĞdžƉůŝĐĂĐŝſŶĚĞůŽƐ ŝŶĚŝǀŝĚƵĂůĞŶĨƵŶĐŝſŶĚĞ
ƉƌŽĐĞƐŽƐĚĞƉĞŶƐĂŵŝĞŶƚŽ;ŶƵĞǀŽĐŽŶŽĐŝŵŝĞŶƚŽͿ͘ĞƐƉƵĠƐĚĞŚĂďĞƌĐĂůĐƵůĂĚŽ sus habilidades y ritmo
individualmente el cociente͕ǀĞƌŝĨŝĐĂƌĄŶƐƵƌĞƐƉƵĞƐƚĂĐŽŶĞůĞƐƚƵĚŝĂŶƚĞƐĞŶƚĂĚŽ de trabajo
ũƵŶƚŽĂĞůůŽƐLJĞdžƉůŝĐĂƌĄŶƐƵƉƌŽĐĞƐŽĚĞƉĞŶƐĂŵŝĞŶƚŽ͘>ŽƐŶŝŹŽƐƉƵĞĚĞŶƚƌĂďĂũĂƌĐŽŶ
los siguientes enlaces en diferentes niveles:
119
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 120
>ŽƐŶŝŹŽƐŵĄƐĂĚĞůĂŶƚĂĚŽƐƉƵĞĚĞŶĐŽŶƚŝŶƵĂƌĐŽŶůĂƐĂĐƚŝǀŝĚĂĚĞƐϮLJϯ͘ůĂůŐŽƌŝƚŵŽ
ĚĞĚŝǀŝƐŝſŶĚĞƚĂůůĂĚŽƐĞƉƌĞƐĞŶƚĂƉŽƌƉƌŝŵĞƌĂǀĞnj͘^ĞƌĞĂůŝnjĂĞůĂŶĄůŝƐŝƐĚĞůĚŝǀŝƐŽƌ dƌĂďĂũŽĂƐŝŶĐƌſŶŝĐŽ
;ƉŽƌĞũĞŵƉůŽ͕ϰϴϰрϰсdžƚĞŶŝĞŶĚŽĞŶĐƵĞŶƚĂƋƵĞϰϬϬрϰсϭϬϬ͕ϴϬрϰсϮϬ͕ϰрϰс Los estudiantes trabajan a
1, por lo tanto 100 + 20 + 1 = 121).
RECIBO su ritmo sin seguir
La empresa 'Glaros' necesariamente la pauta
ĐŽŵƉƌſĞůĞƋƵŝƉŽĚĞ Zd1h>KEd/dKd>
^ŝůůĂƐϰΦϰϴϰ
marcada por el profesor
oficina que puedes
ver en el recibo. ĂũĂƐĚĞůĄƉŝĐĞƐϯ Φϲϵϯ
ƐƚĂŶƚĞƌşĂƐϮΦϰϮϲ
ĂũŽŶĞƐϱΦϱϬϱ
džƉůŝĐĂĐſŵŽůŽŚĂ
calculado cada uno.
͎YƵĠ observas?
Calcula el precio de
Trabajo diferenciado -
Se pide a los estudiantes que resuelvan, horizontalmente, verticalmente y WĂƌƚŝĐŝƉĂĐŝſŶĂĐƚŝǀĂĚĞ
diagonalmente, ůĂƐůşŶĞĂƐĚĞůdƌĞƐĞŶƌĂLJĂ;dŝĐ-Tac-dŽĞͿŵĂƚĞŵĄƚŝĐŽ͘>ĂƷŶŝĐĂ todos los estudiantes a
ĐŽŶĚŝĐŝſŶĞƐƚĂďůĞĐŝĚĂĞƐƌĞƐŽůǀĞƌůĂĂĐƚŝǀŝĚĂĚĐĞŶƚƌĂůĚĞůƚĂďůĞƌŽ͕ĚŽŶĚĞƐĞ ŶŝǀĞůŝŶĚŝǀŝĚƵĂů͕ƐĞŐƷŶĞů
coloca el nuevo conocimiento que deben adquirir ritmo de cada uno.
120
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 121
Es la hora ĚĞů͞dƌĞƐĞŶƌĂLJĂ͟;dŝĐ-tac-toe)
Resuelve al menos tres ejercicios (en vertical, en horizontal o en diagonal) para ganar.
Debes pasar siempre por el centro
Resuelve, utilizando los cubos, Tres amigos fueron a un restaurante a 969y3= 550y5= Tres en raya (Tic ²
ůĂĚŝǀŝƐŝſŶϮϰϴy2=_________ comer. Pidieron la cuenta, que fue de 66y6= 93y3=
ϵϵΦ͘^ŝƋƵŝĞƌĞŶƉĂgar a partes iguales, 844y4= 55y5=
tac ² toe) utilizado
͎ĐƵĄŶƚŽƚŝĞŶĞƋƵĞƉĂŐĂƌĐĂĚĂƵŶŽ͍ 808y4= 426y2= como
KƉĞƌĂĐŝſŶ͗ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ 189y9= Tarjetas de salida
^ŽůƵĐŝſŶ͗ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ
Caterina tiene una cinta que KƉĞƌĂĐŝſŶ Dividendo Divisor Cociente Los 248 alumnos de una
mide 360cm y la corta en 6 escuela fueron divididos en
ƉĂƌƚĞƐŝŐƵĂůĞƐ͎͘ƵĄŶƚŽŵŝĚĞ 936y3= ƉĂƌĞũĂƐ͎͘ƵĄŶƚĂƐƉĂƌĞũĂƐƐĞ
cada trozo? Escoge la formaron?
ŽƉĞƌĂĐŝſŶƋƵĞƚŝĞŶĞƐƋƵĞ 884y4=
ŚĂĐĞƌLJƌĞƐƵĠůǀĞůĂ͘ 639y3= KƉĞƌĂĐŝſŶ͗ͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺͺ
a) 360+6=
555y5=
b) 360y6= ^ŽůƵĐŝſŶ:________________
c) 360x6=
Escribe un problema que se solucione DĂƌşĂǀĂĂƌĞĨŽƌŵĂƌĞů
ĐŽŶůĂƐŝŐƵŝĞŶƚĞŽƉĞƌĂĐŝſŶLJ comedor de su casa. La obra
ƌĞƐƵĠůǀĞůŽ͗ le cuesta 4.200 euros que
quiere pagar en 7 cuotas
dƌĂďĂũŽĂƐŝŶĐƌſŶŝĐŽ
826y2= ŝŐƵĂůĞƐ͎͘ƵĄŶƚŽƉĂŐĂƌĄĞŶ Los estudiantes trabajan a
cada cuota? su ritmo sin seguir
a) 4.200y7= necesariamente la pauta
b) 4.200+7= marcada por el profesor
c) 4.200-7=
ĐƚŝǀŝĚĂĚĞƐĚĞƚƌĂŶƐĨŽƌŵĂĐŝſŶͬĐƚŝǀŝĚĂĚĞƐĚĞĞdžƚĞŶƐŝſŶͬŶƌŝƋƵĞĐŝŵŝĞŶƚŽ
Actividades de
Actividades que pueden ser realizadas si hay tiempo o pueden ser proporcionadas
para el trabajo a domicilio. ƚƌĂŶƐĨŽƌŵĂĐŝſŶ
x /ŶǀĞŶƚĂƌLJƌĞƐŽůǀĞƌĂůŐƵŶŽƐƉƌŽďůĞŵĂƐĚĞĚŝǀŝƐŝſŶ͘ ͬĐƚŝǀŝĚĂĚĞƐĚĞĞdžƚĞŶƐŝſŶ
x ZĞĂůŝnjĂƌĐĄůĐƵůŽƐŵĞŶƚĂůĞƐĚĞĚŝǀŝƐŝſŶƉĂƌĂŶƷŵĞƌŽƐĚĞƚƌĞƐĐŝĨƌĂƐĚŝǀŝĚŝĚŽƐƉŽƌ /Enriquecimiento
ƵŶŶƷŵĞƌŽĚĞƵŶĂĐŝĨƌĂ͘
x Resolver problemas utilizando los nuevos conocimientos
x ũĞŵƉůŽƐĚĞůůŝďƌŽ͗ũ͘ϮLJϯ͕ƉĄŐƐ͘126-127
Completa y escribe la
ŽƉĞƌĂĐŝſŶ
Andrea ha usado la
siguiente forma de resolver
ĞƐƚĂŽƉĞƌĂĐŝſŶ͗ϴϰϮрϮсdž
121
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 122
Objetivos:
Los estudiantes deben ser capaces de:
Comunicación oral: hablar y escuchar
- Comprensión y expresión (producción/presentación) de textos orales en el aula: con-
tar experiencias, relatos biográficos, hablar sobre una profesión.
122
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 123
Núcleo básico de conocimientos y habilidades que deben adquirir todos los estudiantes
Los estudiantes deben ser capaces de:
Comunicación escrita: leer
- Desarrollar estrategias básicas para la comprensión lectora de textos según su tipo-
logía (textos informativos y narrativos):
a) Extraer información del título, las ilustraciones, la estructura en capítulos y el con-
texto para apoyar la comprensión.
b) Determinar cuáles son las palabras clave del texto.
c) Releer los fragmentos en los que encuentra dificultad.
d) Hacer una síntesis del contenido más importante mostrando haber captado el
sentido global.
e) Formular hipótesis durante la lectura, comprobar su validez y detectar si no se
cumplen.
123
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 124
124
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 125
125
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 126
Tarjeta de entrada
Nombre:
Fecha:
Pregunta: Respuesta:
126
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 127
127
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:52 128
128
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:53 129
Evaluación
Se realizará a partir de:
- Preevaluación inicial (actividades de preassessment).
- Evaluación continua del proceso.
- Portafolios personales de trabajo (borradores, infor-
mación encontrada, etc.).
- Productos finales: tarea central y tarea de “re-crea-
ción”.
- Reflexión sobre el proceso seguido, las dificultades en-
contradas y las estrategias aplicadas para solucionar-
las. Para ello se adjuntan un cuestionario de
seguimiento que los alumnos manejarán al Final del
desarrollo de la lección:
129
3_ISPANIKO_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 12:53 130
1. Tengo problemas al leer los textos (cambio palabras, me salto sílabas o palabras,
voy lento, no hago bien las pausas marcadas por los signos de puntuación…)
2. Mis escritos son poco claros, los demás no entienden bien lo que quiero decir
3. Me explico con claridad por escrito, pero tengo muchas faltas de ortografía
4. El contenido de la tarea no me interesa y eso hace que preste poca atención
5. No sabía nada sobre el tema de los textos, todo es nuevo para mí y me ha resul-
tado difícil
6. No he sido capaz de imaginarme de qué podían tratar los textos
7. No me he enterado bien de qué tareas teníamos que hacer
8. Hay muchas palabras y expresiones cuyos significados no conocía
9. Sin ayuda del profesor no sé cómo solucionar las dudas
10. No sé trabajar en grupos grandes, me distraigo y no realizo mis tareas
11. Trabajo mejor en pareja
12. Prefiero trabajar solo/a porque así hago las cosas como yo quiero
13. Cuando no entiendo una palabra lo único que se me ocurre es buscarla en el
diccionario, sin intentar otras cosas
14. Me cuesta encontrar sinónimos o expresar las palabras de otra forma
15. No sé dónde ni cómo buscar información válida para hacer las tareas
16. Es difícil para mí hacer las actividades en las que hay que dar respuestas que no
están expresadas directamente en el texto
17. No me gusta hablar en público cuando debatimos o hacemos presentaciones
orales porque me pongo muy nervioso
18. No me expreso con claridad oralmente, lío las ideas
19. Cuando me encuentro con una cosa que no sé hacer o que no me está saliendo
bien me bloqueo y no quiero seguir trabajando
20. Comprendo las frases y los párrafos, pero no el texto de forma global
21. Me cuesta darme cuenta de las relaciones que hay entre distintas partes del
texto
22. Comprendo el texto de forma global, pero no algunas frases y párrafos
23. Es difícil para mí justificar mis respuestas, explicar por qué
24. Me cuesta formarme una opinión personal sobre un texto y expresarla
25. Es difícil para mí darme cuenta de cuál es la intención del texto (informar, na-
rrar, convencer…)
26. No sé distinguir la información principal de la secundaria
27. No sé hacer esquemas
28. No sé hacer resúmenes con mis propias palabras
29. No soy capaz de continuar el texto y añadirle más párrafos
30. Tengo poca imaginación y no me gustan las tareas de creación de textos
Ahora, señala en esta lista lo que te ha sido de más ayuda cuando has hecho el trabajo:
130
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:57 131
Romania
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:57 132
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:57 133
133
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:57 134
Potrivit lui Tomlinson (2000), cadrele didactice pot diferenţia instruirea folosind strategii
care modifică conţinutul (modul în care sunt prezentate informaţiile), procesul (modul în care
elevii interacţionează cu materialul prezentat), și produsul (modul în care elevii demonstrează
înţelegerea și învăţarea lor), în funcţie de diverse nevoi de învăţare în ceea ce privește cu-
noștinţele anterioare, nivelul de pregătire, profilul de învăţare și stilul preferat de învăţare
(Diagrama 1).
^ƚƌĂƚĞŐŝŝĚĞŝŶƐƚƌƵŝƌĞĚŝĨĞƌĞŶƜŝĂƚĉ
ŶĞǀŽŝĚĞŠŶǀĉƜĂƌĞ
;ĐƵŶŽƕƚŝŶƜĞ͕ŶŝǀĞůĚĞƉƌĞŐĉƚŝƌĞ͕ƉƌŽĨŝůĂůŠŶǀĉƜĉƌŝŝ͕ƐƚŝůĚĞŠŶǀĉƜĂƌĞƉƌĞĨĞƌĂƚͿ
Diagrama 1. Ilustrarea modelului de Instruire diferenţiată a lui Tomlinson (1995, 2000, 2001)
134
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 135
• Opţiune interesantă pentru utilizare și în sălile de clasă obișnuite, săli de curs în care
învăţarea a devenit orientată spre elev și colaborativă, și unde toţi elevii sunt provocaţi
cu succes și în mod semnificativ (Smit & Humpert, 2012);
• Un model de proiectare a instruirii ... care să garanteze învăţarea eficientă pentru in-
divizi diferiţi, care se realizează printr-un curriculum bine planificat și o instruire cen-
trată pe elev ce îmbină diferenţele de pregătire ale elevilor (cunoștinţele elevilor,
înţelegere și abilităţi legate de o anumită secvenţă de învăţare), interese (acele su-
biecte care induc curiozitatea și pasiunea într-un elev), și profilul de învăţare (modul
în care un elev învaţă cel mai bine) din prisma stilului lor de învăţare, inteligenţa do-
minantă, cultură și gen (Maeng & Bell, 2015);
• Predare și învăţare care își propune să obţină o concordanţă între sarcinile și activită-
ţile de învăţare pe de o parte, și nevoile elevilor individuali, pe de altă parte, pentru a
maximiza progresul elevilor (De Neve, Devos & Tuytens, 2015);
• În contextul instruirii diferenţiate, echitatea este posibilitatea pe care toate grupurile
de elevi dintr-o clasă cu abilităţi mixte o au să îndeplinească obiectivele din curriculum
la maxim, în funcţie de abilităţile și competenţele personale, asigurând astfel accesul
egal al tuturor la cunoaștere (Valiandes, 2015).
Trebuie remarcat faptul că diferenţierea nu este la latitudinea fiecărui cadru didactic. O
abordare bazată pe drepturi a diferenţierii (Neophytou & Valiandes, 2017) “implică recu-
noașterea faptului că elevii nu sunt cetăţeni-în-așteptare, ci persoane fizice care deţin drep-
turi încă de acum, inclusiv dreptul de a avea un cuvânt de spus în luarea deciziilor care îi
afectează. Aceasta implică, de asemenea, adoptarea unei reflexivităţi critice și regândirea
unor noţiuni adânc înrădăcinate despre rolurile profesorilor și elevilor în procesul de predare
și învăţare“ (UNICEF, 2012, p.11). Prin urmare, nu este nici caritate nici la latitudinea fiecă-
rui profesor alegerea de a-și diferenţia instruirea. Este o obligaţie a statului și a profesoru-
lui de a proteja drepturile fiecărui copil care face parte dintr-o clasă cu abilităţi mixte. În
acest scop, diferenţierea pare să fie varianta optimă de a respecta acest drept.
De-a lungul anilor a crescut numărul cercetărilor cu privire la multiplele aspecte ale ID.
Pe parcursul ultimilor 5 ani, au apărut multe cercetări care identifică eficacitatea instruirii di-
ferenţiate în diferite medii și discipline educaţionale (Aliakbari & Haghighi, 2014; Joseph, Tho-
mas, Simonette & Ramscook, 2013; Khales Haghighi, 2012; Landrum & McDuffie, 2010; Reis,
McCoach, Little, Muller & Kaniskan, 2011; Simpkins, Mastropieri & Scruggs, 2009; Valiandes,
2015). Rezumând, putem spune că instruirea diferenţiată a fost recunoscută ca o abordare
de control pentru reducerea decalajului de performanţă a elevilor (Bellman, Foshay, & Cre-
million, 2014; Valiandes, 2015).
In ciuda tuturor studiilor care evidenţiază avantajele instruirii diferenţiate, încă există voci
critice datorate, în principal, concepţiilor comune greșite legate de instruirea diferenţiată:
• Ipoteze conform cărora elevii etichetaţi cu ‘’nivel de pregătire mai puţin dezvoltat’’ au
nevoie de instruire mai directă și de o rutină a practicii în locul abordărilor pedagogice
bazate pe cercetare (Bannister, 2016);
• Dacă profesorii își diferenţiază instruirea, aceștia creează capacităţi inegale și incorecte
în rândul elevilor(Rock et al., 2008);
• Modelul de instruire diferenţiată are capacitatea improbabilă de a preveni practici ul-
135
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 136
136
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 137
SCOPUL LECTIEI
CUNOSTINTE SI APTITUDINI
TRANSFORMATIONALE
Cunoștinţele știinţifice ale profesorilor despre disciplina pe care o predau și/ sau tema în-
văţării/ curriculară ghidează stabilirea scopului și obiectivelor lecţiei. Identificarea și stabilirea
cunoștinţelor de bază pe care toţi studenţii trebuie să le dobândească cuprinde elementul de
bază al instruirii diferenţiate deoarece acestea asigură atingerea tuturor obiectivelor, activi-
tăţilor și finalităţilor de evaluare. Apoi, în conformitate cu nucleul cunoștinţelor de bază, se
definesc clar noi cunoștinţe de bază, cunoștinţe esenţiale obligatorii (cunoștinţele necesare
pentru dobândirea cunoștinţelor de bază) și cunoștinţe de transformare (cunoștinţe care se
extind dincolo de planul cunoștinţelor de bază și a celor obligatorii). Cunoștinţele transfor-
maţionale vizează în principal elevii care sunt mai avansaţi decât grupul ţintă așa cum este el
definit de programă și se pot chiar referi la elevi talentaţi (Koutselini, 2006) (Diagrama 2).
137
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 138
138
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 139
139
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 140
Exemplul 2: Matematică-gimnaziu
Scopul instruirii: Elevii ar trebui să fie familiarizaţi cu teorema lui Pitagora și ar trebui să
poată să o aplice, în scopul de a rezolva probleme
Cunoştinţe şi aptitudini obligatorii:
Elevii ar trebui să fie capabili să:
• Deseneze un triunghi dreptunghic şi să numească laturile acestuia (ipotenuză, ca-
tete)
• Calculeze puterea unei baze pozitive cu exponent 2 (mental sau cu ajutorul unui
calculator)
• Calculeze rădăcina pătrată a numerelor naturale (mental sau cu ajutorul unui cal-
culator)
• Calculeze aria unui pătrat.
• Rezolve ecuaţii de gradul 2 cu o necunoscută, ex.: x2 = α, unde α≥Ο.
Cunoştinţe şi aptitudini de bază- Obiective
La sfârşitul lecţiei elevii ar trebui să fie capabili să:
• Prezinte oral relaţia dintre laturile unui triunghi dreptunghic
• Transpună teorema lui Pitagora din limbaj verbal în limbaj algebric
• Identifice ipotezele aplicării teoremei lui Pitagora
• Rezolve exerciţii simple – probleme prin aplicarea teoremei lui Pitagora
Cunoştinţe şi aptitudini transformaţionale
• Rezolve exerciţii-probleme mai complexe prin aplicarea teoremei lui Pitagora
• Utilizeze reciproca teoremei lui Pitagora pentru a demonstra că un triunghi este
dreptunghic.
140
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 141
tăţi de brainstorming sau fișe iniţiale, care necesită o cantitate minimă de timp și pot fi ușor
evaluate de către educator.
Punând accentul pe cunoștinţele obligatorii ce trebuie dobândite de către toţi elevii, prin
intermediul evaluării formative sistematizate, profesorul oferă elevilor a căror performanţă
este sub medie posibilitatea de a lucra în ritmul propriu, cu sau fără ajutor (de exemplu, sus-
ţinerea mentală), în timp ce oferă, în același timp, elevilor avansaţi oportunităţi de a merge
mai departe și de a utiliza aceste cunoștinţe în probleme mai complexe. Profesorii începători
în punerea în aplicare a ID afirmă adesea că acest proces este cronofag, mai ales la început,
deoarece există un volum mare de cunoștinţe obligatorii care trebuie însușite de către elevi.
Se cere timp pentru a preda din nou sau de a corecta lacunele. După un timp, elevii au do-
bândit cunoștinţele nucleu și, prin urmare, au putut lucra mai eficient cu orice cunoștinţe
noi. Acest lucru denotă faptul că educatorii ar trebui să proiecteze cu răbdare și să ajute la con-
struirea de noi cunoștinţe, mai degrabă decât pur și simplu să predea ceea ce este stabilit
prin programă, deoarece dobândirea de noi cunoștinţe ar trebui să se bazeze în mod funda-
mental pe cunoștinţele anterioare.
( DĂŝŵƵůƚƚŝŵƉƉĞŶƚƌƵĂƉƌĂĐƚŝĐĂ
9 ƌĞǀŝnjƵŝƌĞĂĂĚĞĐǀĂƚĉƕŝƐƵĨŝĐŝĞŶƚĉĂ
$ ϭ ĐƵŶŽƕƚŝŶƜĞůŽƌƕŝĂƉƚŝƚƵĚŝŶŝůŽƌ
/ ŽďůŝŐĂƚŽƌŝŝ
8 Ϯ
$
5 DĂŝŵƵůƚƚŝŵƉƉĞŶƚƌƵĂƉƌĂĐƚŝĐĂ
( ĂƚŝŶŐĞƌĞĂƵŶƵŝŽďŝĞĐƚŝǀ
& ϯ
2 ϰ ůĂƐŝĨŝĐĂƌĞĂĂĐƚŝǀŝƚĉԑŝůŽƌŠŶĨƵŶĐԑŝĞ
1 ĚĞƵŶŽďŝĞĐƚŝǀĚĂƚ
7 ϱ
, ç£
1 ѵ£ ŝĨĞƌĞŶԑŝĞƌĞƉĞŶƚƌƵĂƚŝŶŐĞƌĞĂƵŶƵŝ
8 ϲ £
£ ŽďŝĞĐƚŝǀŵĂŝĐŽŵƉůĞdž
$ £
ϳ ĐƚŝǀŝƚĉԑŝĐĂƌĞŝŵƉůŝĐĉĂƉƚŝƚƵĚŝŶŝ
ϴ ĐŽŐŶŝƚŝǀĞĚĞŽƌĚŝŶƐƵƉĞƌŝŽƌ
Mai mult decât atât, proiectarea instruirii într-un mod ierarhizat permite profesorului să
adapteze în mod dinamic activităţile și timpul de care elevii au nevoie pentru a lucra la acti-
vităţi specifice urmărind lucrările elevilor în timpul procesului de învăţare. În practică, acest
141
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 142
lucru înseamnă că elevii au posibilitatea de a lucra în funcţie de ritmul lor de lucru și de în-
văţare și, prin urmare, nu trebuie să urmeze ritmul “de masă” al clasei. Deși toţi elevii pot în-
cepe lecţia cu aceeași activitate, mai târziu, fiecare elev lucrează în ritmul propriu, în timp ce
profesorul supraveghează, sprijină și coordonează toate activităţile din clasă.
O altă caracteristică principală a instruirii diferenţiate în clasificarea unei activităţi este
complexitatea sa și efortul mental necesar. Clasificarea activităţilor se poate face în termeni
de cunoștinţe/aptitudini pe elevii trebuie să le dobândească. Prin urmare, toţi elevii ar tre-
bui să fie în măsură să-și pună în aplicare abilităţile lor de analiză și compunere, dar unii vor
face acest lucru la un nivel mai simplu, iar alţii la un nivel mai complex (Neophytou & Valian-
des, 2015; Valiandes, 2013). Atunci când ne referim la clasificarea activităţilor, noi ne referim
practic la “diferenţierea pe orizontală“, care permite tuturor elevilor să lucreze la dobândi-
rea aceleiași cunoștinţe/aptitudini prin activităţi care sunt clasificate sau ierarhizate în func-
ţie de dificultatea, compoziţia și complexitatea lor. De cele mai multe ori, aceste activităţi
clasificate cuprind aceeași activitate care este fie mai simplificată și mai puţin solicitantă pen-
tru elevii mai slabi, fie mai dificilă și mai complexă pentru elevii mai avansaţi. Aceste activi-
tăţi mai sunt denumite activităţi diferenţiate.
Trebuie clarificat faptul că nici un elev nu ar trebui exclus din activităţile mai complexe.
Dimpotrivă, pe baza observării și evaluării continue a elevilor, profesorii trebuie să adapteze
în mod dinamic activităţile, astfel încât să fie în conformitate cu nivelurile de pregătire ale
elevilor la un moment dat. Pe măsură ce performanţa unui elev se îmbunătăţește, acesta
poate primi sarcini mai dificile, în timp ce pentru cazul în care un elev despre care s-a consi-
derat că este mai avansat pare să rămână în urmă în ceea ce privește anumite abilităţi de
bază, profesorul trebuie să fie gata să-l ajute, atribuindu-i sarcini adecvate și chiar mai sim-
ple de învăţare (Neophytou & Valiandes, 2015). Diferenţierea este deci un proces dinamic
care se bazează pe o planificare flexibilă (Orlich, Harder, Callahan, Trevisan, 2012; Tomlinson,
2001).
Activităţi care să asigure elevilor o înţelegere mai bună și îi ajută să practice ceea ce au
fost învăţaţi, sau chiar să-și transforme cunoștinţele, ar trebui să fie incluse în planificarea
predării. Aceste activităţi ar trebui să fie introduse în timpul predării sub forma unor activi-
tăţi de ancorare. Scopul acestor activităţi este de a maximiza participarea elevilor la activităţile
care au într-adevăr valoare de învăţare și semnificaţie.
Mai mult decât atât, profesorul oferă mijloacele și materialele de care elevii vor avea ne-
voie și administrează accesul elevilor la acestea, astfel încât să nu se piardă nici un moment
de predare valoros sau să se perturbe cursul lecţiei. Elevii trebuie să se familiarizeze cu rutine
de lucru și de utilizare a materialelor disponibile în clasă. Este esenţial ca elevii să stabilească
rutina de a lucra în mod individual, cu ceilalţi colegi sau cu grupul lor și cu întreaga clasă (Di-
grama 3, Valiandes, 2013). De asemenea, elevii trebuie să fie în măsură să utilizeze mijloacele
disponibile pentru a-și susţine stilul lor de învăţare. Unele dintre aceste rutine esenţiale sunt:
scrierea pe caiete, utilizarea software-ului de calculator, refacerea sprijinului mental, utiliza-
rea funcţională a materialelor didactice, echipamente pentru matematică etc.
Sprijinul în învăţare are un rol important în punerea în aplicare a diferenţierii. Suportul
cognitiv poate ajuta elevii să recupereze cunoștinţe fundamentale obligatorii și îi ajută să do-
bândească noi cunoștinţe. Este important ca profesorul să fie atent atunci când elevii ar putea
142
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 143
avea nevoie de sprijin suplimentar. S-ar putea ca profesorul să nu poate fi în măsură să-i ajute
la momentul respectiv, dar elevii ar putea folosi suporturile de învăţare (care pot lua diferite
forme, de exemplu, semne de carte, materiale vizuale, caiete cu notiţe etc.) care le vor per-
mite elevilor să lucreze pe cont propriu, fără a avea nevoie în mod constant de ajutorul pro-
fesorului. Prin urmare, profesorul are mai mult timp pentru a ajuta și sprijini pe cei care au
cu adevărat nevoie de ajutor, maximizând astfel timpul de predare și învăţare individualizată
(Neophytou & Valiandes 2015; Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017b)
Diferenţierea nu poate fi abordată în absenţa evaluării. Evaluarea este vitală și esenţială
pentru planificarea, reflectarea și reproiectarea instruirii diferenţiate. În consecinţă, pe lângă
evaluarea iniţială, este important să se planifice și să se proiecteze atât evaluarea formativă
cât și evaluarea finală. Prin evaluarea formativă, profesorul dobândește informaţii cu privire
la nivelul de lucru al elevilor, dificultăţile pe care le-ar putea întâlni, concepţiile greșite pe
care le-ar putea avea și o idee generală asupra progresului lor, care îi permite să-și adapteze
instruirea în mod dinamic.
Planificarea instruirii diferenţiate poate fi încheiată cu furnizarea evaluării finale, nu ca o
modalitate de a testa și de a compara elevii între ei, ci pentru a evalua nivelul de cunoștinţe
și abilităţi pe care elevii le-au dobândit. Evaluarea finală poate lua forma unor activităţi de fi-
nalizare, care constituie o tehnică rapidă și informală de evaluare. Informaţiile colectate prin
evaluarea finală vor sprijini reflecţia profesorului asupra instruirii elevilor, oferind în același
timp baza pentru elaborarea următoarei instruiri diferenţiate.
143
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 144
Mult mai multe strategii și tehnici pot fi găsite în vasta literatură disponibilă. Odată ce
profesorii se familiarizează și se simt confortabil în implementarea ID, își pot dezvolta, de ase-
menea, strategii și tehnici proprii.
144
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 145
individuală, care favorizează dezvoltarea unei zone de confort personal pentru învăţare. Lu-
crând individual, elevii pot progresa și trece la următoarea activitate, conform planului de
lecţie ierarhizată și lucrează astfel într-un mod asincron, diferenţiat faţă de colegii lor. Prin
munca asincronă, elevii care învaţă mai greu și cu performanţe mai scăzute au mai mult timp
pentru a lucra și a învăţa cunoștinţe și abilităţi de bază, în timp ce elevii cu un nivel ridicat și
rapid de învăţare pot progresa, dezvoltându-și și consolidându-și învăţarea și abilităţile. În
acest fel, sunt satisfăcute nevoile tuturor elevilor, iar aceștia se simt fericiţi să lucreze la acti-
vităţi care sunt semnificative și provocatoare pentru ei. Trasarea unei imagini a instruirii di-
ferenţiate, munca individuală a elevilor care permite ca ei să lucreze și să înveţe asincron este
o parte din rutina de lucru de bază, potrivit căreia munca individuală este urmată de muncă
colaborativă și lucru cu întreaga clasă.
ELEV PROFESOR
x $MXWRUúLVSULMLQ
1. (OHYLLOXFUHD]ă
individual individualizat
x Sprijin mental
x &RPXQLFDUHúLVXSRUW
pentru elevi
3. 7RDWăFODVDOXFUHD]ă x 0RQLWRUL]HD]ăOXFUXO
2. (OHYLLOXFUHD]ă
elevilor
vPSUHXQă vPSUHXQăúLFRODERUHD]ă
x EvaOXHD]ă finalizarea
VDUFLQLLúLDWLQJHUea
obiectivelor
145
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 146
etajată este un instrument de predare a unui singur concept și satisfacerea diferitelor nevoi
de învăţare într-un grup. Sarcinile și/sau resursele pot varia în funcţie de profilul de învăţare,
pregătire și interes. Utilizarea activităţilor diferenţiate maximizează probabilitatea ca fiecare
elev să deprindă abilităţi cheie și înţelegere, și ca fiecare să fie provocat în mod corespunză-
tor.
Etape ale implementării
• Dezvoltarea sarcinii pe nivel, în conformitate cu standardele stabilite de programă.
• Ajustarea sarcinii pentru crearea unei sarcini sub nivel pentru elevii cu dificultăţi.
• Ajustarea sarcinii pentru crearea unei sarcini peste nivel pentru elevii avansaţi.
Tehnici la clasă
Pentru elevii cu dificultăţi
• Nivel: Furnizarea de lecturi/materiale mai accesibile (nivel, vocabular, formă etc.) pe
aceeași temă; utilizarea de lecturi înregistrate.
• Structură: Furnizarea textelor evidenţiate; utilizarea de organizatori grafici pentru a di-
recţiona lectura și rezolvarea problemelor
• Complexitate: Simplificarea complexităţii unei sarcini prin furnizarea de ajutoare (linii
directoare, suport de învăţare etc.), care îi va ghida prin diferitele etape necesare pen-
tru a atinge obiectivul stabilit ca minimal pentru toţi elevii din clasă.
Pentru elevii avansaţi
• Nivel: Furnizarea de lecturi/ materiale avansate/nivel expert (nivel, vocabular, formă
etc.) pe aceeași temă
• Ritm: Cereţi elevilor să analizeze informaţia despre autor/inventator și o piesă/pro-
blemă similară pentru a căuta conexiuni/tipare
• Creativitate: Furnizarea de sarcini mai deschise – a lăsa spaţiu elevilor pentru a expe-
rimenta cu diferite opţiuni cu privire la atingerea unui obiectiv bine precizat (același
obiectiv ca și cel pentru restul clasei)
• Complexitate: creșterea nivelului de complexitate al unei sarcini
146
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 147
147
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 148
Exemplul 4: Activitate etajată - Scrierea unui eseu persuasiv, clasele a 4-a – a 6-a (Heacox,
2002)
148
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 149
Evaluare Elevii vor fi capabili să Elevii vor fi capabili Elevii vor fi capabili să
scrie un paragraf de să exprime un punct scrie un eseu de cinci
cinci propoziţii în care de vedere și să-și paragrafe care
afirmă și sprijină o idee susţină ideea cu exprimă un punct de
principală. Acest ajutorul a două vedere, apără
paragraf va îndeplini paragrafe care apără punctul de vedere și
criteriile din grila punctul de vedere, utilizează surse
naţională de scriere. folosind idei pentru a-și sprijini
principale și detalii punctul de vedere.
de sprijin. Paragrafele Eseul va îndeplini
vor îndeplini criteriile criteriile din grila
din grila naţională naţională de scriere.
de scriere.
Etapele implementării
1. Crearea activităţilor: Pentru a începe, se creează activităţi specifice sau un set de acti-
vităţi care coincid cu domeniul de conţinut și care urmează să fie utilizate în anumite
faze ale lecţiei. Activităţile pot varia pentru diferite niveluri de calificare și interese.
2. Introducerea activităţilor: Odată ce aceste activităţi au fost create, se introduce ideea
de activităţi ancoră la elevi. Se descriu așteptările, sarcinile, timpul necesar pentru a
lucra la activităţi.
3. Evaluarea: Evaluarea activităţilor se poate face atât în timpul orelor cât și prin confe-
rinţe elev-profesor, fișe de notare și contracte cu elevii.
Tehnici de clasă
• utilizare pentru orice subiect
149
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 150
Etapele implementării
1. Întreabă-te “Care este cel mai bun tip de configurare pentru a atinge obiectivul meu
de învăţare pentru această activitate?” Gândește-te la posibilitatea unui grup condus
de profesor (cu întreaga clasă, grup mic, sau o activitate individuală direcţionată de
profesor), sau un grup condus de elevi (în colaborare, bazat pe performanţă sau pe
150
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:58 151
perechi).
2. Evaluează toate datele de evaluare și uită-te peste profilurile de învăţare ale elevilor
pentru a forma grupuri.
3. Identificaţi cel mai eficient mod de grupare al elevilor. De exemplu, gruparea în func-
ţie de gen, grupul precedent, selectarea elevilor, sau selecţia făcută de către profesor.
Tehnici la clasă
• Creaţi un sistem cu coduri de culori sau un grafic pentru a vă ajuta pe dumneavoastră
(și pe elevi) să identifice ușor grupul din care fac parte.
• Daţi instrucţiuni specifice cu privire la sarcinile pe care grupurile trebuie să le efec-
tueze.
• Scrieţi pe tablă instrucţiuni și așteptări clare, astfel încât să nu trebuiască să le repetaţi
iar și iar.
• Creaţi și practicaţi rutine și proceduri pentru a intra în și a ieși din grupuri. Creaţi o ru-
tină astfel încât sala de clasă să nu devină un “haos total” atunci când o sarcină de grup
este finalizată.
• Setaţi o anumită limită de timp pentru ca elevii să finalizeze activitatea de grup. Este
bine să setaţi o alarmă astfel încât elevii să știe că atunci când alarma se declanșează,
ei trebuie să treacă la următoarea activitate în liniște.
• Creaţi un jurnal de învăţare al elevilor pentru fiecare grup. Un cod de culori funcţio-
nează cel mai bine pentru elevi pentru a ţine evidenţa și a înregistra ceea ce au făcut
în cadrul fiecărui grup.
Etapele implementării
1. Identificarea scopurilor și obiectivelor unui anumit domeniu sau curs.
2. Identificarea elevilor care urmează să fie incluși în evaluare.
3. Evaluarea competenţei elevilor într-un anumit domeniu.
4. Propunerea de alternative pe care acești elevi le vor găsi mai stimulante.
151
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 152
Tehnici la clasă
• Oferă elevilor orientări de evaluare pentru a le permite să-și noteze progresul în învă-
ţare de-a lungul unei anumite perioade.
• Mentorat între elevi (ca alternativă, elevul poate acţiona ca mentor pentru alţi elevi din
clasă).
• Învăţarea prin cooperare.
• Lucru autonom (individual sau în perechi) pentru cercetarea și propunerea de soluţii
la o problemă legată de conţinutul studiat (participarea la activităţi care servesc co-
munităţii).
• Oferiţi elevilor ghiduri de evaluare pentru a le permite să își noteze progresul în învă-
ţarea unei unităţi date.
152
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 153
a nivelului de pregătire, al cunoștinţelor și abilităţilor elevilor lor într-un anumit domeniu. In-
formaţiile furnizate de către fișele utilizate vor ghida deciziile de predare ale profesorilor către
o instruire diferenţiată eficientă (Valiandes & Neofytou, 2017b). Atât activităţile de început
cât și cele de finalizare pot lua forma unor întrebări/activităţi închise sau deschise, în funcţie
de scopul și aria subiectului care trebuie să fie evaluat.
Fișele de intrare ajută elevii să reflecteze la ceea ce știu lucrând și reamintindu-și cunoș-
tinţele obligatorii pentru a lucra și a învăţa noi cunoștinţe. Aceste activităţi sunt foarte utile
pentru a identifica concepţii greșite sau lacune ale elevilor legate de cunoștinţele obligatorii
prealabile. Aceste informaţii vor permite profesorului să adapteze instruirea, în scopul de a
corecta înţelegerea greșită și de a oferi elevilor oportunităţi de a lucra și de a învăţa cunoș-
tinţele cerute. Bineînţeles că nu este întotdeauna cazul, deoarece nu toţi elevii sunt capabili
să dobândească aceste cunoștinţe în acest interval mic de timp. În aceste cazuri, suporturile
de învăţare trebuie folosite pentru a ajuta elevii să lucreze și să înveţe.
Crearea și utilizarea fișelor de intrare
• După determinarea cunoștinţelor obligatorii preliminare gândiţi-vă la activităţi care
vor ajuta elevul să-și amintească aceste cunoștinţe
• Creaţi o fișă de intrare care poate fi prezentată elevilor oral, proiectată vizual sau în
formă printată
• La scurt timp după ce elevii se liniștesc introduceţi lecţia distribuind fișele la care toţi
elevii vor trebui să lucreze timp de 2-4 minute.
• Elevii pot scrie răspunsurile pe caiete, pe un post-it, pe o bucată de hârtie goală sau pe
o fișă furnizată de către profesor
• Elevii care finalizează activitatea de pe fișa de intrare își pot verifica rezultatele cu ele-
vii de lângă ei sau cu grupul lor.
• Profesorul verifică activitatea elevilor pe măsură ce aceștia lucrează și selectează in-
formaţii cu privire la nivelul lor de cunoaștere și înţelegere cu privire la subiectul res-
pectiv.
• Fișele de intrare nu sunt colectate de obicei de către profesor, dar s-ar putea face acest
lucru, în cazurile în care vrea să le studieze, în scopul de a obţine mai multe informaţii
despre lucrul individual al elevilor.
Exemplu 1: Fișe de intrare pentru Istorie elementară (Valiandes & Neofytou, 2017b).
Scopul lecţiei: Elevii ar trebui să fie în măsură să identifice și să vorbească despre diferenţele
dintre epocile Paleolitic și Neolitic
Cunoștinţe obligatorii prealabile: Elevii ar trebui să fie în măsură să identifice și să vorbească
despre principala caracteristică a epocilor paleolitice. Profesorul va cere elevilor să lucreze pe
fișa de intrare pentru a evalua cunoștinţele lor despre acest subiect.
Fişa de intrare
Alegeţi şi lucraţi una dintre aceste activităţi
1. Notaţi câteva cuvinte (sau fraze) care vă vin în minte atunci când auziţi cuvântul
Paleolitic.
2. Desenati o imagine despre Paleolitic și pregătiţi-vă să vorbiţi despre aceasta în
clasă.
153
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 154
Exemplu 2: Fișa de intrare pentru lecţie de matematică (Valiandes & Neofytou, 2017b).
Tema lecţiei: Suprafaţa formelor geometrice
Ce úWLĠLGHVSUHIRUPHOHGHPDLMRV"
Fișele de ieșire ajuta elevii să reflecteze la ceea ce au învăţat și măsura în care se pot fo-
losi aceste noi cunoștinţe și/sau aptitudini. Această informaţie va ghida profesorul în proiec-
tarea următoarei lecţii pe acest subiect, având în vedere ceea ce a fost deja învăţat și ce
trebuie să fie revizuit sau repetat, în scopul de a rezolva toate lacunele. Fișele de ieșire sunt
foarte bune deoarece consumă doar câteva minute pentru a fi pregătite de către profesor, iar
elevii le pot finaliza foarte repede.
Categorii generalizate și exemple de fișe de ieșire (Fisher & Frey, 2004):
• Îndemnuri care documentează învăţarea,
Ex. Scrie un lucru pe care l-ai învăţat astăzi.
Ex. Discută cum ar putea fi utilizată lecţia de astăzi în viaţa reală.
• Îndemnuri care subliniază procesul de învăţare,
Ex. Nu am înţeles…
Ex. Scrie o întrebare legată de lecţia de astăzi.
• Îndemnuri pentru evaluarea eficienţei instruirii
Ex. Ţi-a plăcut să lucrezi în grupuri mici astăzi?
154
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 155
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Name ______________________________________ Class_________
155
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 156
sorii să ofere elevilor posibilităţi de a-și aminti și de a lucra pe cunoștinţele obligatorii prea-
labile, într-un efort de a evalua înţelegerea lor, gradul de stăpânire sau concepţiile greșite în
ceea ce privește această cunoaștere sau abilitate. Rezultatele acestei evaluări informale ini-
ţiale ajută profesorul la diagnosticarea nivelului de achiziţie de cunoștinţe anterioare ale ele-
vului și îi permit să acţioneze în consecinţă, prin asigurarea suportului mental corespunzător,
care va sprijini elevii în construcţia de noi cunoștinţe sau dezvoltarea de noi competenţe.
Orice lucru care poate sprijini procesul cognitiv al elevului pentru a reduce efortul de
lucru poate fi numit suport de învăţare. Este important ca orice suport de învăţare pe care îl
oferim elevilor să fie ușor de înţeles și de folosit. Un suport funcţional este un instrument util
pe care elevul îl poate utiliza atunci când lucrează, de exemplu un semn de carte, un tabel cu
formule, un poster. De multe ori elevii au nevoie să folosească suportul de învăţare în mod
repetat, până când ajung să stăpânească cunoștinţele propuse.
Exemple:
• tabele de înmulţire pot fi folosite ca suport de învăţare pentru predarea împărţirii
• o planșă cu adverbe poate fi folosită pentru a sprijini povestirea
• o listă de adjective poate fi folosită pentru a sprijini scrierea creativă.
3.2.3. RAFT
RAFT (Tomlinson, 2003; Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017) este o strategie de scriere, care îi
ajută pe elevi să înţeleagă rolurile lor ca scriitori, publicul abordat, formatele variate pe care
le pot folosi pentru scris și tema despre care vor scrie. Prin utilizarea acestei strategii, profe-
sorii încurajează elevii să scrie creativ, să abordeze un subiect dintr-o perspectivă diferită și
să practice scrierea pentru diferite segmente de public. Acesta include scrierea din diferite
puncte de vedere. Acest lucru îi ajută pe elevi să dobândească importante abilităţi de scriere,
cum ar fi publicul, ideea principală, și organizarea. Îi învaţă pe elevi să gândească creativ des-
pre scris răspunzând la următoarele întrebări:
Rolul scriitorului: Cine sau ce ești tu ca scriitor? (Un președinte, o jucărie, un anumit perso-
naj) Care este rolul tău în poveste? Cum îţi afectează acest rol scrisul?
Audienţa/publicul: Cui scrii? (Unui coleg de școală, unui profesor, cititorilor unui ziar) Care este
limbajul corespunzător atunci când te adresezi acestui public special?
Formatul: În ce format scrii? (Scrisoare, poem, discurs)
Topicul și subiectul principal: Despre ce scrii? De ce? Care este subiectul sau ideea principală?
Etapele implementării
1. Identificaţi obiectivele de învăţare ale lecţiei / unităţii.
2. Utilizaţi datele din evaluare și profiluri elevilor pentru a determina disponibilitatea, sti-
lurile de învăţare și interesele elevilor.
3. Proiectaţi sarcini diferite de scriere stabilind rolul scriitorului, publicul, formatul și tema
textului.
4. Aranjaţi sarcinile pe o planșă de opţiuni RAFT.
5. Verificaţi următoarele:
156
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 157
Tehnici la clasă
RAFT este o strategie care prezintă mai multe moduri de a răspunde nevoilor tuturor ele-
vilor, în funcţie de nivelul și nevoile lor identificate. Posibile idei pentru RAFT:
- personaje dintr-o poveste, figuri istorice, locuri de muncă, termeni-cheie, oameni de
știinţă sau politicieni, instrumente muzicale, boli, formaţiuni geografice, cuvinte din vocabu-
lar, personaje de desene animate, tipuri de ţesături, compozitori sau artiști, instrumente sau
unelte, forme sau culori, autori sau inventatori, oameni de afaceri sau antreprenori, minerale
sau elemente chimice, orașe, ţări sau continente, termeni tehnici etc. Metoda poate fi de
asemenea folosită la lecţii de matematică.
Exemplu
Exemplu de RAFT pentru o lecţie de limbă străină pe subiectul alimentaţiei
Rol Audienţă/public Format Topic/subiect
Chef Client Meniu Descriere detaliată a
tuturor ingredientelor
Scriitor de carte Bucătari Reţetă Instrucţiuni privind
de reţete prepararea produselor
alimentare
Client Proprietar de Plângere Problemă cu mâncarea
restaurant sau serviciu prost
Elev în vizită într-o Părinţi Scrisoare Descrierea unei mese
ţară străină tipice pe care o poţi
mânca în ţara străină pe
care o vizitaţi
Scriitor de Cititor care vrea Recomandare Lucruri bune de mâncat în
călătorii să călătorească această ţară străină și ce
este de evitat
3.2.4. Tic-tac-toe
Tic-tac-toe (Nunley, 2006; Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017), cunoscut și sub numele de
Think-tac-toe, este un instrument de diferenţiere care oferă o colecţie de activităţi din care
elevii pot alege pentru a-și demonstra înţelegerea. Se prezintă sub forma unei grile cu nouă
pătrate, similară cu o placă de tic-tac-toe, iar elevii trebuie să completeze de la unu la “trei
într-un șir”. Activităţile variază în conţinut, proces și produs și pot fi adaptate pentru a aborda
diferite niveluri de pregătire, interese și stiluri de învăţare ale elevilor. Pătratul din centru
poate fi lăsat deschis pentru ca elevul să selecteze o activitate proprie. Activităţile tic-tac-toe
157
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 158
pot fi date fiecărui elev din clasă, celor cu aptitudini mai bune pentru activităţi de îmbogăţire,
iar celor mai slabi pentru revizuire și practică. Implicarea în această strategie încurajează în-
văţarea independentă. Cadrele didactice ar trebui să verifice elevii periodic și să ceară elevi-
lor să ţină un jurnal al progresului lor. În cazul unor activităţi de lungă durată, planșa de
tic-tac-toe poate fi, de asemenea, utilizată cu întrebări scurte, deschise, puse la nivele dife-
rite ale taxonomiei lui Bloom.
Etapele implementării
1. Identificaţi rezultatele și obiectivul educaţional al unităţii de studiu.
2. Utilizaţi datele de evaluare și profilurile elevilor pentru a determina pregătirea, stilu-
rile de învăţare și interesele elevilor.
3. Proiectaţi nouă sarcini diferite, bazate pe cunoștinţe / abilităţi pe care elevii ar trebui
să le lucreze și evalueze.
4. Aranjaţi sarcinile pe o planșă din care elevii să aleagă, plasând în caseta centrală sar-
cina pe care toţi trebuie să o finalizeze.
5. Elevii aleg și efectuează trei sarcini, dintre care una trebuie să fie sarcina din căsuţa
din mijloc. Cele trei sarcini ar trebui să completeze un rând Tic-tac-toe.
6. Elevii care finalizează un Tic-tac-toe pot continua și să încerce să finalizeze mai multe
activităţi și mai multe Tic-tac-toe.
Tehnici la clasă
• Permiteţi elevilor să completeze oricare trei sarcini, chiar dacă sarcinile finalizate nu al-
cătuiesc un Tic-tac-toe.
• Creaţi diferite planșe în funcţie de nivelul de pregătire (Elevii mai slabi lucrează cu op-
ţiunile de pe o planșă, în timp ce elevii avansaţi au opţiuni diferite).
• Creaţi planșe cu opţiuni bazate pe stiluri de învăţare sau preferinţe de învăţare. De
exemplu, o astfel de grilă ar putea include trei sarcini kinestezice, trei sarcini auditive,
trei sarcini vizuale.
• Creaţi planșe cu mai mult de 9 opţiuni (de exemplu, 16).
• In loc de a cere elevilor să completeze sarcinile pentru a face un tic-tac-toe, cereţi-le
să lucreze sarcini complete, astfel încât aceștia să proiecteze/coloreze un anumit model
in interiorul pătratului 3x3, de exemplu:
158
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 159
Exemplu 1:
Planșă Tic-tac-toe pentru un comentariu de carte
Desenaţi o imagine a Creaţi o planșă care arată Scrieţi un cântec despre unul
personajului principal. încheierea unei povești. dintre principalele evenimente.
Scrieţi un poem despre Creaţi un poster care arată Îmbracă-te ca personajul tău
două evenimente ordinea evenimentelor preferat și ţine un discurs
principale din poveste. din povestire. despre cine ești.
Creaţi o diagramă Venn Scrieţi două paragrafe Scrie două paragrafe
pentru compararea și despre personajul despre decorul poveștii.
evidenţierea diferenţelor principal.
dintre introducere și
încheiere.
Exemplu 2:
PlanƕĉdŝĐ-tac-ƚŽĞƉĞŶƚƌƵŵĂƚĞŵĂƚŝĐĉ
Nume: ..................................................................
0DWHPDWLFă- Tic- Tac-toe ± Clasa a 2-a
159
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 160
Capitolul 2), toate fiind ulizate pe durata învăţării pentru a maximiza implicarea acvă,
pe sarcini, a tuturor elevilor în procesul de învăţare. În connuare, prin aplicarea diferite-
lor tehnici și strategii de instruire diferenţiată (vezi Capitolul 3), planul de lecţie stabilește
un cadru care își propune să permită elevilor cu diferite aptudini și nivele de pregăre să
îndeplinească aceleași obiecve, în mp ce lucrează la sarcini diferenţiate în funcţie de ne-
voile lor, de profilul de învăţare și de ritm.
Primul exemplu este un proiect didacc despre predarea împărţirii la clasa a IV-a în în-
văţământul primar. Acest exemplu se bazează pe curriculumul din Cipru și, prin urmare,
reflectă conţinutul manualelor ulizate în Republica Cipru. Cu toate acestea, întrucât ma-
temaca poate fi considerată ca fiind ”lingua franca”, suntem convinși că acest proiect de
lecţie va oferi informaţii ule și exemple bune pe care orice profesor va putea să le folo-
sească, indiferent de unde provine.
Al doilea exemplu este un proiect didacc despre predarea înmulţirii şi împărţirii în con-
centrul 0-100 prin adunări/ scăderi repetate la clasa a II-a. Tema este preluată din pro-
grama școlară și manualele de matemacă din învăţământul românesc. (The second
example is a didacc project on teaching mulplicaon and division in concentraon 0-
100 by repeated recruitment/ downgrading to class II. The theme is taken from the sylla-
bus and the mathemacs textbooks in Romanian educaon.)
Obiective:
Copiii vor:
• Efectua împărţiri cu un divizor cu o singură cifră, utilizând diferite strategii, materiale
și reprezentări.
• Rezolva probleme cu înmulţiri.
• Utiliza algoritmul împărţirii.
Evaluare
• Continuă - în funcţie de răspunsul copiilor la sarcinile orale și scrise din timpul cursu-
lui.
• Bilete de ieșire (Exit slip).
Elevilor li se prezintă şi sunt îndemnaţi să exploreze p. 108 din manual.
160
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 161
ĐƚŝǀŝƚĂƚĞĚĞƐĐŚŝƐĉ
ůĞǀŝůŽƌůŝƐĞƉƌĞnjŝŶƚĉƔŝƐƵŶƚŠŶĚĞŵŶĂԑŝƐĉĞdžƉůŽƌĞnjĞƉ͘ϭϬϴĚŝŶŵĂŶƵĂů͘ pentru a motiva elevii
EXPLORARE: ƕi a-ŝŝŵƉůŝĐĂŠŶ
8WLOL]DĠLFXYLQWHXQGHVHQ ƉƌŽĐĞƐƵůĚĞŠŶǀĉƜare
sau simboluri pentru a
HIHFWXDvPSăUĠLUHD
ϯϵϲрϯс.......
RETINETI!
^ƵƉŽƌƚĚĞŠŶǀĉƜare:
caiet, cuburi
^ĞĐĞƌĞĞůĞǀŝůŽƌƐĉĞdžƉůŝĐĞĐƵŵǀŽƌĞĨĞĐƚƵĂ matematice, semn de
ŠŵƉĉƌԑŝƌĞĂ͗
carte; Verbalizarea
ϯϵϲрϯс.......
ŐąŶĚŝƌŝŝ͖
3X6=18
Fiecare elev poate folosi fie caietul, cuburile Lucru individual/ pe
ϭϴрϯсϲ
ƔŝͬƐĂƵƐĞŵŶƵůůŽƌĚĞĐĂƌƚĞ͘ ŐƌƵƉĞͬĐƵƚŽĂƚĉĐůĂƐĂ
ϭϴрϲсϯ
6X16 = 6 X (10+6)
= (6X10)+(6x6)
= 60 + 36
= 96
161
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 162
Lucru asincron
ůĞǀŝŝůƵĐƌĞĂnjĉŠŶƌŝƚŵ
ƉƌŽƉƌŝƵĨĉƌĉĂƚƌĞďƵŝ
ƐĉƵƌŵĞnjĞƵŶƌŝƚŵ
general rigid impus de
profesor.
ŽƉŝŝůŽƌůŝƐĞĐĞƌĞĂƉŽŝƐĉůƵĐƌĞnjĞĐƵŽǀĞƌƐŝƵŶĞĚŝĨĞƌĞŶƜŝĂƚĉĂĂĐƚŝǀŝƚĉƜii
anterioare, cu situaƜŝĂŠŶĐĂƌĞnjĞĐŝŵĂůĞůĞŶƵƉŽƚĨŝŠŵƉĉƌƜite cu exactitate. De
ĞdžĞŵƉůƵ͕ϰϭϮрϯБǀƐĂƵϭϴϵрϵБǀ͘^ĞƉƵŶĞĂĐĐĞŶƚƉĞĞdžƉůŝĐĂƌĞĂƉƌŽĐĞƐĞůŽƌ
ĚĞŐąŶĚŝƌĞ;ĐƵŶŽƕtinƜĞŶŽŝͿ͘ƵƉĉĐĞƐ-ĂĐĂůĐƵůĂƚŠŶŵŽĚŝŶĚŝǀŝĚƵĂů
ĐŽĞĨŝĐŝĞŶƚƵů͕ĨŝĞĐĂƌĞĞůĞǀǀĞƌŝĨŝĐĉƌĉƐƉƵŶƐƵůĐƵĞůĞǀƵůĚĞůąŶŐĉĞůƕŝĞdžƉůŝĐĉ
ƉƌŽĐĞƐƵůĚĞŐąŶĚŝƌĞ͘ŽƉŝŝŝƉŽƚůƵĐƌĂůĂƵƌŵĉƚŽĂƌĞůĞůŝŶŬ-uri pe diferite
niveluri:
162
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 163
([SOLFDɉLPRGXO
vQFDUHDOXFUDW
&DOFXODɉLSUHɉXO fiecare copil.
Ce observati?
Un birou Un raft
Un dulap
Lucru diferenƜiat -
/ŵƉůŝĐĂƌĞĂĐƚŝǀĉĂ
tuturor elevilor la
ŽƉŝŝŝĞĨĞĐƚƵĞĂnjĉĐĂůĐƵůĞůĞŠŶĐĂŝĞƚĞůĞůŽƌƕŝͬƐĂƵƵƚŝůŝnjĞĂnjĉĐĂƌƚŽŶĂƕe de ŶŝǀĞůŝŶĚŝǀŝĚƵĂů͕ŠŶ
calculat laminate. funcƜie de ritmul
ĨŝĞĐĉƌƵŝcopil.
163
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 164
ĐƚŝǀŝƚĉƜi transformaƜŝŽŶĂůĞͬĐƚŝǀŝƚĉƜŝĚĞĞdžƚŝŶĚĞƌĞͬĐƚŝǀŝƚĉƜŝĚĞŠŵďŽŐĉƜire
ĐĂƌĞƉŽƚĨŝƵƚŝůŝnjĂƚĞĚĂĐĉĞƐƚĞƚŝŵƉƐĂƵƉŽƚĨŝĚĂƚĞĐĂƚĞŵĉƉĞŶƚƌƵĂĐĂƐĉ Lucrul asincron al
x Scriu ƕŝƌĞnjŽůǀĉƐŝŶŐƵƌŝƉƌŽďůĞŵĞĐƵŠŵƉĉƌƜiri. ĞůĞǀŝůŽƌŠŶĂĐĞĂƐƚĉ
x ZĉƐƉƵŶĚůĂŠŶƚƌĞďĉƌŝ͕ĐĂůĐƵůąŶĚŵĞŶƚĂůŠŵƉĉƌƜiri de numere cu 3 cifre la lecƜie poate oferi timp
ŶƵŵĞƌĞĐƵŽĐŝĨƌĉ͕ĂŶĂůŝnjąŶĚŵĞŶƚĂůĚŝǀŝnjŽƌƵů͘ ŠŶƉůƵƐĞůĞǀŝůŽƌƉĞŶƚƌƵ
x ZĞnjŽůǀĉƉƌŽďůĞŵĞƵƚŝůŝnjąŶĚĐƵŶŽƕtinƜele noi. a lucra la ĂĐƚŝǀŝƚĉƜile
x Exemple din carte, ex. 2 ƕi 3, pp. 126-127. transformaƜionale/de
extindere/de
&RPSOHWDɉL üL VFULHɉL ŠŵďŽŐĉƜire.
HFXDɉLD.
Andreas a rezolvat
HFXDɉLDvQPRGXO
XUPĉWRU¸ Y
Rezolvati ecuatiile
XUPĉWRDUHXWLOL]kQG
metoda lui Andreas.
164
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 165
165
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 166
166
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 167
167
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 168
ANEXA 1
FIŞA DE LUCRU
ÎNMULŢIREA ȘI ÎMPĂRŢIREA
1. Calculează: 2. Scrie factorul lipsă:
4 x 8 = ____ 7 x 9 = ____ ____ x 5 = 40 5 x ____=20
9 x 7 = ____ 5 x 9 = ____ ____ x 6 = 30 8 x ____=40
2 x 9 = ____ 3 x 4 = ____ ____ x 9 = 72 9 x ____=36
5 x 7 = ____ 9 x 9 = ____ ____ x 4 = 28 3 x ____=30
6 x 8 = ____ 8 x 6 = ____ ____ x 2 = 18 9 x ____= 81
45 : 9 = 72 : 9 = 42 : 7 = 28 : 4 = 45 : 9 =
50 : 5 = 18 : 2 = 24 : 6 = 72 : 9 = 27 : 9 =
36 : 4 = 30 : 3 = 12 : 6 = 48 : 6 = 64 : 8 =
3. Completează enunţurile:
a) Numărul de 6 ori mai decât 9 este_________.
b) Numărul cu 9 mai mare decât 6 este_______.
c) Produsul numerelor 5 şi 8 este _______ .
d) Suma numerelor 5 şi 10 este ________.
e) Produsul numerelor 5 şi 10 este ________.
ANEXA 1 DIFERENŢIAT
ADUNAREA ȘI SCĂDEREA
1. Calculează:
1+1= 2+2= 3+3=
1+2= 2+3= 3+4=
1+3= 2+4= 3+5=
1+4= 2+5= 3+6=
1+5= 2+6= 3+7=
2. Calculează:
10+5= 25-15= 44-22=
18+2= 44-10= 53-11=
22+8= 25+11= 27-19=
16+4= 44+22= 89-87=
17+3= 15-12= 35-29=
168
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 169
ANEXA 2
Rezolvă corect şi spune ce ai descoperit pe verticala AB !
CODUL:
C R I E A P L U T
56 16 7 8 9 0 5 4 66
A
8x2
32 : 4
7x8
72 : 8
99 x 0
42 : 6
66 X 1
36 : 9
40 : 8
3x3
4X4
56:7 B
169
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 170
ANEXA 3
Tehnica ,,Floare de lotus”
Calcule
$IOă GXEOXO
QXPăUXOXL
$IOă QXPăUXOGHRUL
PDLPDUHGHFkW
$IOăMXPăWDWHD
QXPăUXOXL
$IOăFkWXOQXPHUHORU ÌQPXO܊LUea
܈L ܈i &DOFXOHD]ă
ÌPSăUĠLUHD 9x9=
0 - 100
0ăUH܈WHGH
10 ori
QXPăUXO $IOăVIHUWXO
'HvPSăUĠLWXO QXPăUXOXL
este 20,
vPSăUĠLWRUXO
este 5.
Care este
FkWXO"
170
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 171
ANEXA 4
CIORCHINE
2EDh>Ԑ/Z
ADUNARE
23(5$Ġ,, ^R
MATEMATICE
2DWZԐ/ZE
JETOANE CUVINTE:
9 PRODUS
9 2DWZԐ/d
9 FACTOR
9 X
9 :
9 2DWZԐ/dKZ
9 d
9 ^hD;dKd>Ϳ
9 ^^hd
9 ^dKZ
9 -
9 +
9 TERMENI
9 D/&ZEf;Z^dͿ
171
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 172
ANEXA 5
TEMĂ
1) Ce fracţie este reprezentată în desen? 2) Completaţi după model:
2 x 7 = ____ 3 x 9 = ____
14 : 2 = 7 ____ : ___ = ____
14 : 7 = 2 ____ : ___ = ____
3) Scrieţi împărţirile:
3 x 5 = ____ ____ : ____ = ____
2 x 6 = ____ ____ : ____ = ____
7 x 8 = ____ ____ : ____ = ____
9 x 5 = ____ ____ : ____ = ____
4 x 8 = ____ ____ : ____ = ____
TEMĂ (Diferenţiat)
1. Calculează:
14+ 4= 13+10= 14+11= 27-26= 29 - 8= 12 - 2=
172
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 173
MESAJUL ZILEI
1) Vă anunţ cu bucurie
2) Că astăzi vom face o călătorie
3) Fără maşini şi avioane
4) Fără autobuze şi autocare,
5) Vom călători cu mare zor
6) În minunata lume a PRIMĂVERII!
173
4_ROUMANIA_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:59 174
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 175
Slovene
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 176
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 177
177
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 178
ŝĨĞƌĞŶĐŝƌĂŶĞƵēŶĞƐƚƌĂƚĞŐŝũĞ
hēŶĞƉŽƚƌĞďĞ
;njŶĂŶũĞ͕ƵēŶĂƉƌŝƉƌĂǀůũĞŶŽƐƚ͕ƵēŶŝƉƌŽĨŝů͕ƉƌĞĨĞƌĞŶēŶŝƵēŶŝƐůŽŐͿ
V zadnjem desetletju je diferenciran pouk pritegnil vse več pozornosti kot inovativna
učna praksa, ki se lahko spoprime z izzivi sodobnega pouka. Čeprav imajo različni strokov-
njaki različne poglede na diferenciran pouk, se vsi strinjajo, da je diferenciran pouk prime-
ren odziv na različne potrebe učencev in učenk. Gre za:
• Pouk, ki ga učitelj načrtuje proaktivno in preudarno, da lahko naslovi niz različnih
potreb učencev, namesto da bi načrtoval en sam pristop za vse in poskušal reaktivno
prilagoditi načrt, šele ko postane očitno, da pouk ni ustrezno pripravljen za nekatere
izmed učencev, ki jim je bil namenjen (C. Tomlinson, A. , 2001).
• Procesni pristop k poučevanju in učenju za učence z različnimi učnimi zmožnostmi v
istem razredu (Hall, Strangman in Meyer, 2002).
• Pouk, ki zahteva vlaganje bolj zavestnega napora v analizo razpoložljivih podatkov in
v sprejemanje odločitev o tem, kaj deluje in kaj je treba zastaviti drugače (Gregory
in Chapman, 2007).
• Diferenciacijo poučevanja in učenja kot sodobni izziv za učitelje, da delujejo kot raz-
vijalci učnega načrta na mikro ravni (Koutselini in Agathagelou, 2009).
• Pouk, ki ga lahko oblikujejo učitelji na temelju svojega poznavanja učnih preferenc
učencev (t.j. njihove bistrosti, talentov, učnega sloga), tako da omogočijo učencem
izbiro oblike dela, bodisi samostojnega dela, dela s partnerjem ali v skupini; da jim
zagotovijo različne delovne prostore, ki spodbujajo različne učne preference (t.j.
miren prostor za delo, delovni prostor za mizo namesto v šolski klopi) (Ireh in Ibe-
neme, 2010).
• Zanimivo možnost, ki jo lahko uporabimo tudi v navadnem razredu, v razredih, kjer
izvajamo na učenca osredinjen in sodelovalen pouk in kjer vsi učenci dobijo smiselne
izzive, ki jim omogočijo uspeh (Smit in Humpert, 2012).
• Model načrtovanja pouka …, ki zagotavlja učinkovito učenje za različne posameznike
ter se izvaja s skrbno načrtovanim učnim načrtom in na učenca osredinjenim po-
ukom, ki združuje razlike v učenčevi učni pripravljenosti (znanju, razumevanju in
178
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 179
179
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 180
ki je bolj osredinjen na učence. Učitelj se mora pred poukom vprašati, kako lahko delajo, se
odzivajo, učijo njegovi učenci, kaj bo zanje težko ali preveč lahko itd.
Kljub temu učiteljev ne smemo izpostavljati kritikam, če v prizadevanjih, da bi diferen-
cirali pouk, nimajo ustrezne podpore izobraževalnega sistema. Učitelje moramo z dosled-
nim usposabljanjem in oporo podpirati v prizadevanjih za diferenciacijo pouka (Affholder,
2003; Smith, 2011; Valiandes in Neophytou, 2017a). Zato udeležencev seminarjev za učite-
lje, ki temeljijo na tradicionalnih predavateljskih enosmernih pristopih od zgoraj navzdol,
ne bomo prepričali, da bi sprejeli in vzdrževali predlagane spremembe v poučevanju.
Uspešni so tisti programi, ki jih strokovnjaki oziroma mentorji razvijajo glede na potrebe
učiteljev in ki jim zagotavljajo nenehno podporo in povratno informacijo za trajnostne spre-
membe. Vrh tega prizadevanja za učinkovit učiteljev razvoj ne zadevajo le spretnosti
poučevanja, temveč je njihov cilj razvijati učiteljeve spretnosti raziskovanja in poizvedova-
nja, ki krepita njegovo moč, da postane razmišljujoč strokovnjak. Danes poudarjamo obli-
kovanje visoko kakovostnih poklicnih razvojnih programov, za katere je značilno aktivno
učenje, kolektivno sodelovanje, osredotočanje na vsebinsko znanje in metode poučevanja,
ki so tesno povezani z učnim načrtom in obstoječo realnostjo poučevanja, ki trajajo dovolj
časa in so dovolj kontinuirane (Valiandes in Neophytou, 2017b). Izboljšana učinkovitost
šolanja je v medsebojni povezavi z izboljšano učinkovitostjo učiteljev, podobno pa lahko
učinkovitost učiteljev dejansko izboljšamo s kakovostnim programom njihovega poklicnega
razvoja in učenja.
Poudariti je treba, da diferenciacija ni najlažji izhod iz tradicionalnih “izenačevalnih”
pristopov, zato pa velja, da lahko zagotovo prispeva k izboljšanju učinkovitosti poučevanja
in k razvoju vseh učencev v kombiniranih razredih. Namen diferenciacije kot pristopa k po-
učevanju je kar najbolj povečati možnosti učenja za vsakega učenca. Zato jo lahko pojmu-
jemo kot odziv na kritike tehnokratske in pozitivistične tradicije, ki predlaga, kakor poudari
Tomlinson (2001), spreminjanje učnih praks in privzemanje takih, ki bodo dinamično vpli-
vale na učni proces in ga oblikovale na temelju učnih postopkov, ki ustrezajo raznoličnosti
populacije učencev, ki jo najdemo prav v vsakem razredu.
180
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 181
Učitelj se pri opredelitvi namena in ciljev učne ure ravna po svojem strokovnem po-
znavanju vede, ki jo poučuje, oziroma/in učnega predmeta/teme iz učnega načrta. Temeljni
element diferenciranega pouka je opredelitev in določitev temeljnega jedrnega znanja, ki
ga morajo pridobiti vsi učenci in ki nam omogoči, da so doseženi vsi učni cilji, izpolnjene vse
aktivnosti in cilji preverjanja znanja. Glede na opredeljeno jedrno znanje moramo jasno
opredeliti temeljno znanje (novo znanje), zahtevano predhodno znanje (znanje, ki je po-
trebno za pridobivanje temeljnega znanja) in transformativno znanje (znanje, ki sega dlje
od temeljnega in predhodnega znanja). Transformativno znanje je večinoma namenjeno
učencem, ki so učno zmožnejši od glavne ciljne skupine, kot jo opredeljuje učni načrt, lahko
pa je namenjeno tudi nadarjenim učencem (Koutselini, 2006, str. 87).
&,/-8ý1(85(
',1$0,ý1,
KONTEKST TRANSFORMATIVNO FLEKSIBILNO
8ý,7(/-(9(*$ ZNANJE IN SPRETNOSTI PRILAGAJANJE
PROFESINALNEGA 328ý(9$1-$
RAZVOJA =$67$9/-(1,&,/-,8ý1(85(
OPREDELITEV METODOLOGIJE ±
AKTIVNOSTI IN ORGANIZACIJA RAZREDA
181
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 182
spretnosti in odnosov, ki jih mora ob koncu učne ure obvladati vsak učenec ne glede na
njegovo učno zmožnost. Jedrno znanje, ki ga imajo možnost usvojiti vsi učenci, je temelj di-
ferenciranega pouka (Koutselini, 2008; Tomlinson in Alan, 2004; Valiandes, 2015). Učitelj to
zagotovi tako, da učno uro načrtuje na način, da vsem učencem zagotovi priložnosti, da
pridobijo nove spretnosti in novo znanje, ter jim omogoči uporabo, apliciranje in nazadnje
transformiranje znanja tako, da postane njihovo osebno znanje.
Tako zahtevano predhodno znanje kot temeljno znanje sta del tako imenovanega os-
novnega znanja in ju moramo upoštevati pri načrtovanju pouka. Zahtevano predhodno zna-
nje/spretnosti je opredeljeno kot znanje/spretnosti, ki ga mora učenec pridobiti, preden
začne graditi novo znanje. Pri temeljnem znanju/spretnostih pa gre za znanje/spretnosti,
ki jih mora učenec obvladati po koncu učne ure.
Ker mora učenec imeti zahtevano predhodno znanje, da bi lahko gradil novo znanje,
moramo predhodno preveriti njegovo znanje. Tako mu damo priložnost, da ga znova pri-
kliče v spomin in obnovi, učitelj pa na ta način lahko odkrije morebitno učenčevo napačno
razumevanje snovi ali njegove druge težave z učenjem. Učitelji večinoma predpostavljajo,
da je zahtevano predhodno znanje tudi zares usvojeno, kar pomeni, da so učenci specifi-
čno znanje pridobili pri preteklih učnih urah. Na to se načeloma ne moremo zanesti, razen
če gre za znanje in/ali spretnosti, ki smo jih posredovali in ovrednotili nedavno pred tem in
se prepričali, da so učenci določeno vsebino tudi zares usvojili.
Učni cilji temeljijo v jedrnem znanju in spretnostih in so temelj diferenciranega pouka,
saj pomagajo učitelju, da ostane osredotočen na tisto, kar bi rad dosegel. Hkrati ga učni
cilji tudi usmerjajo pri sprotnem in formativnem vrednotenju, ki je odličen vir informacij,
kar zadeva dinamično diferenciacijo pouka. Ko učitelj postavi učne cilje, vnaprej ve, kaj se
morajo njegovi učenci naučiti do konca učne ure in katero znanje mora preveriti (na ta
način za vse postavi realno visoka pričakovanja).
182
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 183
183
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 184
Za za«etek
zagotovite EĂŵĞŶŝƚĞǀĞēēĂƐĂnjĂǀĂũŽ͕ĚĂƵēĞŶĐŝƵƐƚƌĞnjŶŽ
6
3 u«encem moānost, ŽďŶŽǀŝũŽnjŶĂŶũĞŝŶǀƚĂŶĂŵĞŶĚŽǀŽůũĚŽůŐŽ
5 ϭ da obnovijo svoje ǀĂĚŝũŽnjĂŚƚĞǀĂŶŽƉƌĞĚŚŽĚŶŽnjŶĂŶũĞŝŶ
2 predznanje ƐƉƌĞƚŶŽƐƚŝ
Ϯ
7
1
2 To stopnjo EĂŵĞŶŝƚĞǀĞēēĂƐĂnjĂǀĂũŽ͕ĚĂ
naj doseāejo ĚŽƐĞǎĞƚĞĚŽůŽēĞŶĐŝůũ
ϯ vsi u«enci
3
5 ϰ ZĂnjǀƌƐƚŝƚĞĂŬƚŝǀŶŽƐƚŝŶĂƚĞŵĞůũƵĚĂŶĞŐĂĐŝůũĂ
( Po
ϱ pri«akovanjih
9
( naj bi to stopnjo
5 ϲ dosegla ve«ina ŝĨĞƌĞŶĐŝĂĐŝũĂnjŶĂŵĞŶŽŵĚŽƐĞēŝ
- u«encev ŬŽŵƉůĞŬƐŶĞũƓŝĐŝůũ
$
1
- ϳ
Po pri«akovanjih
( ϴ naj bi to stopnjo ŬƚŝǀŶŽƐƚŝ͕ŬŝnjĂŚƚĞǀĂũŽ
doseglo le nekaj ŬŽŐŶŝƚŝǀŶĞƐƉƌĞƚŶŽƐƚŝǀŝƓũĞŐĂ
u«encev ƌĞĚĂ
184
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 185
navajajo, da je ta proces zelo dolgotrajen, zlasti na začetku, kadar morajo učenci obnoviti
veliko zahtevanega predznanja. Takrat porabijo veliko časa za to, da bodisi ponovno pred-
stavijo neko snov ali popravijo njeno napačno razumevanje. S časom pa učenci pridobijo je-
drno znanje in se lahko bolj učinkovito posvečajo pridobivanju novega znanja. Iz tega je
razvidno, da morajo učitelji potrpežljivo snovati gradnjo novega znanja in pri tem pomagati
učencem. Njihova naloga namreč ni le poučevanje po učnem načrtu, saj mora biti pridobi-
vanje novega znanja utemeljeno na trdnem predznanju.
Poleg prej navedenega načrtovanje učnih aktivnosti po hierarhičnem zaporedju omo-
goča učitelju, da z opazovanjem učencev pri delu med potekom učnega procesa dinamično
prilagaja dejavnosti in čas potrebam učencev. V praksi to pomeni, da imajo učenci mož-
nost delati v lastnem delovnem in učnem tempu in jim ni treba slediti tempu večine v ra-
zredu. Čeprav morda vsi učenci začnejo učno uro z isto dejavnostjo, pozneje vsak učenec
dela v lastnem tempu, medtem ko učitelj nadzira delo, nudi učencem oporo in koordinira
vse delo v razredu.
Druga pomembna značilnost diferenciranega pouka je razvrščanje dejavnosti po kom-
pleksnosti in zahtevnosti miselnega dela. Dejavnosti lahko razvrščamo po znanju/spretno-
stih, ki jih morajo učenci pridobiti. To pomeni, da morajo biti vsi učenci sposobni uporabiti
svoje spretnosti analize in sestavljanja, vendar jih bodo nekateri uporabili na bolj osnovni,
drugi pa na bolj zahtevni ravni (Neophytou in Valiandes, 2015; Valiandes, 2013). Ko govo-
rimo o razvrščanju dejavnosti, imamo v mislih ‘horizontalno diferenciacijo’, ki omogoča
vsem učencem pridobivanje istega znanja/spretnosti s pomočjo dejavnosti, ki so razvrš-
čene ali stopnjevane po težavnosti, sestavi in kompleksnosti. Večinoma gre pri tako razvrš-
čenih dejavnostih za isto dejavnost, ki je bodisi poenostavljena in manj zahtevna za manj
zmožne učence oziroma predstavlja večji in kompleksnejši izziv za učno zmožnejše učence.
Te dejavnosti imenujemo tudi dejavnosti po stopnjah.
Poudariti moramo, da učitelj ne bi smel nobenega učenca izključiti iz zahtevnejših dejav-
nosti. Nasprotno, na osnovi nenehnega opazovanja in vrednotenja učenčevega dela, mora uči-
telj dinamično prilagajati dejavnosti, da bodo v skladu z vsakokratnim učenčevim znanjem in
pripravljenostjo. Ko začne učenec dosegati boljše rezultate, mu lahko dodelimo zahtevnejše na-
loge oziroma mora biti učitelj pripravljen pomagati tudi učno zmožnejšemu učencu s prilago-
jenimi, lažjimi nalogami, kadar ta zaostaja za drugimi v določenih temeljnih spretnostih
(Neophytou in Valiandes, 2015). Diferenciacija je torej dinamičen proces, ki temelji na prilag-
odljivem načrtovanju (Orlich, Harder, Callahan, Trevisan, & Brown, 2012; Tomlinson, 2001).
V načrtovanje učenja moramo vključiti dejavnosti, ki omogočajo učencu, da bolje ra-
zume snov in da vadi, kar se je naučil, ali celo da transformira svoje znanje. Te dejavnosti
vpeljemo med poukom v obliki t.i. sidrnih dejavnosti (dejavnosti za utrjevanje znanja).
Namen teh dejavnosti je kar najbolj povečati učenčevo sodelovanje pri dejavnostih, ki imajo
zanj v danem trenutku dejansko učno vrednost in pomen.
Pri tem učitelj učencem priskrbi tudi potrebna učna sredstva in material ter sam določi,
kateri učenec bo delal z določenim materialom ali sredstvom, da ne izgublja dragocenega
učnega časa oz. moti poteka pouka. Učenci se morajo seznaniti z zaporedjem oblik dela v
razredu in uporabljati materiale, ki so na voljo v razredu. Nujno je, da se naučijo zaporedja
oblik dela, se pravi, da znajo delati samostojno, v paru ali skupini oziroma s celim razre-
dom (Slika 4). Tudi učenci morajo znati uporabljati razpoložljiva sredstva, ki podpirajo nji-
hov učni slog. Nekatere izmed najpomembnejših stalnih oblik dela so pisanje v zvezek,
uporaba računalniških programov, uporaba miselnih pomagal, funkcionalna raba učnih pri-
pomočkov, pripomočkov za učenje matematike itn.
185
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 186
Učna podpora ima pomembno vlogo pri izvajanju diferenciacije. Miselna pomagala
lahko pomagajo učencem obnoviti zahtevano predhodno znanje in temeljno znanje ter pri-
dobivati novo znanje. Pomembno je, da učitelj ve, kdaj učenci potrebujejo dodatno pomoč.
Učitelj jim prav v tistem trenutku morda ne bo mogel pomagati, vendar lahko uporabijo
učna pomagala (ki so lahko v različnih oblikah, na primer knjižna znamenja, vizualni pripo-
močki, beležnice itn.), ki jim omogočijo samostojno delo, ne da bi ves čas potrebovali uči-
teljevo pomoč. Tako ima učitelj več časa za to, da ponudi pomoč in podporo tistim, ki jo
zares rabijo, s čimer prihrani kar največ časa za individualizirano poučevanje in učenje
(Neophytou in Valiandes, 2015; Valiandes in Neophytou, 2017)
O diferenciaciji ne moremo razmišljati brez preverjanja znanja. Preverjanje znanja je
ključnega pomena in bistveno za načrtovanje, reflektiranje in preoblikovanje diferencira-
nega pouka. Posledično je poleg predhodnega preverjanja pomembno tudi, da načrtujemo
in pripravimo tako formativno kot končno (sumativno) preverjanje znanja. S formativnim
preverjanjem znanja učitelj pridobi informacijo o učenčevi stopnji znanja, težavah, s kate-
rimi se učenec srečuje, morebitnem napačnem razumevanju snovi, prav tako pa dobi splo-
šno sliko njegovega napredka, ki mu omogoča dinamično prilagajanje pouka.
Načrtovanje diferenciranega pouka lahko sklenemo s končnim preverjanjem znanja,
vendar ne z namenom, da bi učence preizkušali ali jih primerjali z vrstniki, temveč da bi
ocenili raven pridobljenega znanja in spretnosti. Končno ocenjevanje lahko poteka z listki
za končno ugotavljanje znanja (ang. exit slip), ki so hitra in neformalna tehnika vrednote-
nja znanja. Informacije, ki jih bo učitelj zbral ob končnem preverjanju znanja, mu bodo v
pomoč pri razmišljanju o pouku, hkrati pa bodo temelj za njegovo oblikovanje naslednje di-
ferencirane učne ure.
186
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:51 187
V obsežni literaturi s tega področja lahko najdemo še veliko več strategij in tehnik. Ko
se učitelj seznani z diferenciranim poukom in se privadi nanj, lahko razvije tudi svoje stra-
tegije in tehnike.
187
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 188
napredujejo od ene dejavnosti k drugi glede na hierarhično pripravo učne ure. Pri tem de-
lajo asinhrono, tj. ne delajo vsi hkrati istih nalog, temveč sočasno delajo vsak svoje, njim pri-
lagojene naloge in v njim lastnem tempu dela. Z asinhronim delom imajo manj uspešni in
počasnejši učenci več časa za delo in pridobivanje temeljnega znanja in spretnosti, učno
zmožnejši učenci in tisti, ki se hitro učijo, pa lahko hitreje napredujejo, razvijajo in izbolj-
šujejo svoje znanje in spretnosti. Tako upoštevamo potrebe vseh učencev in prispevamo k
njihovemu zadovoljstvu, saj se le-ti ukvarjajo s smiselnimi dejavnostmi, katerih težavnost
je prilagojena vsakemu posamezniku. V okviru diferenciranega pouka je individualno uče-
nje, ki učencem omogoča asinhrono delo in učenje, del temeljnega delovnega postopka, po
katerem individualnemu delu sledita sodelovalno učenje v parih in manjših skupinah ter
delo z vsem razredom.
hE h/d>:
Slika 4: Zaporedje oblik dela v razredu (Valiandes, 2013; Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017b)
188
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 189
Izvedbene faze
• Oblikujte nalogo na ustrezni stopnjio zahtevnosti glede na merila, predvidena v
učnem načrtu.
• Nalogo prilagodite za nižjo stopnjio zahtevnosti za učno manj zmožne učence.
• Nalogo prilagodite za višjo stopnjio zahtevnosti za učno zmožnejše učence.
189
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 190
190
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 191
Prva stopnja: Poišči vse različne načine, na katere lahko svoje matematične ploščice raz-
vrstiš v skupine.
Druga stopnja: Poišči vse različne vzorce, ki jih lahko narediš iz svojih matematičnih ploščic.
Tretja stopnja: Naredi palični grafikon, na katerem prikažeš vse različne vrste matemati-
čnih ploščic v svoji vrečki.
Primer1 4: Stopenjska aktivnost – Kako napišemo prepričljiv spis Za 4.-6. razred
Začetna stopnja Srednja stopnja Višja stopnja
Rezultat/cilj Učenci določijo temo Učenci določijo Učenci določijo
in napišejo odstavek temo, izrazijo temo, izrazijo
s petimi povedmi, stališče in napišejo stališče in napišejo
sestavljen iz glavne dva odstavka, najmanj pet
misli, treh podpornih v katerem odstavkov dolg
stavkov in sklepnega zagovarjajo spis, pri katerem
stavka. svoje stališče. uporabijo več
virov, da zagovarjajo
svoje stališče.
Pouk/aktivnost Učenci prejmejo Učenci prejmejo Učenci pregledajo
zgled odstavka s zgled prepričljivega grafični organizator
petimi stavki in spisa in grafični pisanja spisa in
jasna navodila, kako organizator, ki prejmejo jasna
morajo napisati svoj prikazuje, kako se navodila, kje najdejo
odstavek. Kot sestavi spis. Dobijo vire in citate za spis.
aktivnost pred tudi jasna navodila Kot aktivnost pred
pisanjem navedejo za pisanje spisa. Kot pisanjem uporabijo
svojo temo in vsaj aktivnost pred grafični organizator
tri stvari v podporo pisanjem uporabijo za lažje načrtovanje
svoji temi. grafični organizator, spisa. Sestavijo tudi
ki jim bo v pomoč seznam petih virov,
pri načrtovanju ki zagovarjajo njihovo
pisanja. glavno stališče.
Vrednotenje Učenci so sposobni Učenci so sposobni Učenci so sposobni
napisati odstavek s izraziti stališče in napisati spis s petimi
petimi stavki, ki uspešno zagovarjati odstavki, ki izraža
uspešno izraža in misel v dveh odstavih, njihovo stališče in v
podpira njihovo v katerih zagovarjajo katerem so
glavno misel. svoje stališče, tako uporabljeni viri, ki
Odstavek izpolnjuje da uporabijo glavne podpirajo to
kriterije pisanja v misli in podporne stališče. Spis
učnem načrtu. podrobnosti. izpolnjuje kriterije
Odstavka izpolnjujeta pisanja v učnem
kriterije pisanja v načrtu.
učnem načrtu.
191
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 192
Izvedbene faze
1. Oblikujte sidrne dejavnosti: Na začetku oblikujte specifične dejavnosti ali niz dejav-
nosti, ki sovpadajo z danim vsebinskim področjem in ki jih nameravate uporabiti v do-
ločeni fazi učne ure. Za različne stopnje sposobnosti in zanimanja lahko pripravite
različne dejavnosti.
2. Vpeljite dejavnosti: Potem ko ste dejavnosti oblikovali, jih kot posebno vrsto (lahko
jim daste posebno privlačno ime, npr. »poslastice«) predstavite učencem. Opišite, kaj
pričakujete od njih, kakšne naloge bodo delali in koliko časa imajo zanje.
3. Ocenjevanje: Ocenjevanje dejavnosti lahko poteka tako med poukom kot indivi-
dualno po pouku, s pomočjo individualnih pisnih pogodb med učencem (starši) in
učiteljem, itd.
192
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 193
obliki želite.
• Napišite poskus, ki bi ga lahko izvedli, da bi druge poučili o znanstvenem pojmu, o ka-
terem ste se učili v razredu.
• Ustvarite miselni vzorec/mrežo, pri čemer uporabite računalniško aplikacijo ali pro-
gram, da drugim prikažete določen znanstveni pojem.
• Raziščite pomemben dogodek ali izum v znanosti. Ugotovite, kaj se je v času, ko je
prišlo do tega dogodka, dogajalo drugod po svetu. Ali so ti dogodki med seboj v kakš-
nem razmerju/povezavi/součinkovanju?
• Naredite seznam desetih po vašem mnenju najbolj perečih okoljskih problemov v
današnjem svetu. Navedite jih po vrstnem redu pomembnosti.
193
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 194
• Določite natančno časovno omejitev, znotraj katere morajo učenci zaključiti s sku-
pinskim delom. Najbolje je, da nastavite alarm, tako da učenci vedo, da morajo tiho
začeti z drugo dejavnostjo, ko zazvoni alarm.
• Vpeljite učenčev dnevnik znanja, ki ga je pridobil v vsaki posamezni skupini. Najbo-
lje deluje sistem z barvnimi oznakami, da lahko učenci ves čas spremljajo in si bele-
žijo, kaj so dosegli v kateri skupini.
Izvedbene faze
1. Določite namene in cilje danega učnega področja ali predmeta.
2. Določite, katere učence boste vključili v evalvacijo.
3. Ocenite kompetence učencev na določenem področju.
4. Predlagajte alternativne vsebine, ki bi bile za te učence večji izziv.
5. Pripravite individualni vodnik za načrtovanje izobraževanja, ki naj vključuje:
- PODROČJA UČNEGA NAČRTA, KI PRIDEJO V POŠTEV ZA ZDRUŽEVANJE CILJEV: Pri-
skrbite kratek opis temeljih gradiv, ki jih morate predelati v konkretnem ocenje-
valnem obdobju in podatke o presoji oz. dokaze, ki kažejo, da je cilje potrebno
združiti.
- POSTOPKI ZA ZDRUŽEVANJE TEMELJNEGA GRADIVA: Opišite dejavnosti, ki jih
boste uporabili, da boste zagotovili ustrezno poznavanje temeljnih področjih
učnega načrta.
- POSPEŠITVENE IN/ALI OBOGATITVENE DEJAVNOSTI: Opišite dejavnosti, ki jih
boste uporabili, da boste zagotovili učne izkušnje na višji stopnji na posameznih
področjih rednega učnega načrta.
194
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 195
Primer
Združevanje učnih ciljev za 5. razred
195
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 196
• Odgovore naj napišejo v zvezek, na majhen listek, na prazen list papirja ali na izročke,
ki jih razdeli učitelj.
• Učenci, ki zaključijo z delom, lahko preverijo svoje odgovore s sošolcem iz iste klopi
ali skupine.
• Učitelj sproti preverja delo učencev in izbira dejavnosti za pouk glede na njihovo
stopnjo znanja in razumevanja določene teme.
• Navadno učitelj kartončkov ne pobere, lahko pa to stori, če jih želi pregledati, zato
da bi dobil več informacij o individualnem delu učencev.
Primer 2: Začetni ocenjevalni listek za učno uro matematike: Učna ura matematike: geo-
metrijski liki (Valiandes & Neophytou, 2017b)
<ĂũǀĞƓŽƐƉŽĚŶũŝŚůŝŬŝŚ͍
1. Poimenuj like.
2. Navedi gůĂǀŶĞnjŶĂēŝůŶŽƐƚŝ;ŬŽƚŝ͕ƐƚƌĂŶŝĐĞͿǀƐĂŬĞŐĂůŝŬĂ͘
196
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 197
pravili napačno razumevanje. Končni ocenjevalni listki so zelo praktični za uporabo, saj jih
lahko učitelj pripravi v nekaj minutah in jih učenci lahko izpolnijo zelo hitro.
Primer 1: KONČNI OCENJEVALNI LISTEK za uro angleščine. Učni cilj: Ocena učenčeve
sposobnosti uporabljati primernik
EĂƉŝƓŝƉŽǀĞĚŝ͕ƐŬĂƚĞƌŝŵŝďŽƓƉƌŝŵĞƌũĂůͬĂǀŽnjŝůŝŶĂ sliki.
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
Ime ____________________________________
25
Razred________
197
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 198
Primer 2: Končni ocenjevali listek 3, 2, 1 (ang. Exit slip - 3, 2, 1): Splošna oblika končnega
ocenjevalnega listka, ki se lahko uporabi na različne načine in pri različnih predmetih
ϯ͕Ϯ͕ϭ<KEE/KE:s>E/>/^d<
Ime ͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͗ ĂƚƵŵ͙͙͙͙͙͙͙͗
EĂƉŝƓŝ͙͘͘
ϯƐƚǀĂƌŝ͕ŬŝƐŝƐĞũŝŚĚĂŶĞƐŶĂƵēŝůͬĂŝŶŬĂŬŽũŝŚďŽƓƵƉŽƌĂďŝůͬĂ͗
3 _________________________________________________________________
2 _________________________________________________________________
1 ________________________________________________________________
ϮƐƚǀĂƌŝ͕ŽŬĂƚĞƌŝŚďŝƌĂĚͬĂǀĞĚĞůͬĂǀĞē͗
2 ________________________________________________________________
1 _________________________________________________________________
ϭƐƚǀĂƌ͕ŬŝƐĞƚŝũĞnjĚĞůĂƚĞǎŬĂĂůŝƚŝŶŝďŝůĂǀƓĞē
1. ___________________________________________________________________
198
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 199
Avtor: Kdo ali kaj si kot avtor besedila (si predsednik, igrača, določen lik v zgodbi)? Kakšna
je tvoja vloga v zgodbi? Kako lahko ta vloga vpliva na tvoje pisanje?
Vrsta besedila: Kakšno vrsto besedila pišeš (pismo, pesem, govor)?
Tema in bistvo: O čem pišeš? Zakaj? Kaj je tema tvojega besedila oz. za kaj gre v njem?
Občinstvo: Za koga pišeš (za sošolca, učitelja, bralce ali za časopis)? Kakšen jezik je pri-
merno uporabiti, ko nagovarjaš vsakega od teh vrst publike?
Izvedbene faze
1. Opredelite učne cilje za to učno uro/enoto.
2. S pomočjo podatkov o preverjanju znanja in profilov učencev ugotovite, v kolikšni
meri so učenci pripravljeni in spoznajte njihove učne sloge oziroma zanimanja.
3. Oblikujte različne pisne naloge glede na ugotovljene različne vloge pisatelja, razli-
čna občinstva, besedilne vrste ali teme besedila.
4. Naloge razvrstite v izbirno tabelo AVTO.
5. Preverite naslednje:
- Ali AVTO ustreza različnim učnim slogom?
- Ali vloge, besedilne vrste in stopnje predznanja vključujejo različne težavnostne
stopnje?
- Ali vloge, besedilne vrste in teme ustrezajo raznoličnosti zanimanj učencev?
199
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 200
Izvedbene faze
1. Opredelite učne izide in osrednjo temo učne enote.
2. Pripravljenost, učne sloge in zanimanja učencev ugotovite s pomočjo podatkov o
preverjanju njihovega znanja in o njihovih učnih profilih.
3. Oblikujte devet različnih nalog, ki temeljijo na znanju/spretnostih, ki jih morajo
učenci usvojiti.
4. Razvrstite naloge v tabeli »tri v vrsto«, pri čemer na srednje polje postavite nalogo,
ki jo morajo izpolniti vsi učenci.
5. Učenci nato izberejo in izpolnijo tri naloge, pri čemer mora biti ena od njih naloga,
ki je zapisana v sredinskem polju. Izpolnjene naloge tvorijo »tri naloge v eni vrsti«.
6. Učenci, ki dokončajo eno tabelo »tri v vrsto«, lahko nadaljujejo in izpolnijo še več
aktivnosti in več tabel »tri v vrsto«.
200
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 201
201
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:52 202
202
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:53 203
4.1. Priprava učne ure 1: Matematična učna priprava, ki temelji na diferenciaciji pouka
Četrti razred: Deljenje – zakon o razčlenjevanju
Cilji:
Otroci bodo ob koncu učne ure znali:
• Deliti z enomestnim deliteljem, z uporabo različnih strategij, materialov in prikazov.
• Reševati besedilne naloge z uporabo množenja.
• Uporabljati algoritem deljenja.
Vrednotenje
• Sprotno, odvisno od odziva otrok na ustne in pisne naloge med učno uro.
• Listek za končno ugotavljanje znanja (ang. exit slip)
203
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:53 204
WŽƚĞŬƵēŶĞƵƌĞ Diferenciacija
sƐĂŬ ŽƚƌŽŬ ĚŽďŝ ůŝƐƚĞŬ njĂ njĂēĞƚŶŽ ƵŐŽƚĂǀůũĂŶũĞ njŶĂŶũĂ͕ ĚĂ ƐĞ ůĂŚŬŽ ƵĚĞůĞǎŝ Potek dela
ŵĂƚĞŵĂƚŝēŶĞŐĂƉŽƚŽǀĂŶũĂ͕ŬŝƐĞƉƌĂǀŬĂƌnjĂēĞŶũĂ͘KƚƌŽĐŝŵŽƌĂũŽŚŝƚƌŽƌĞƓŝƚŝēŝŵǀĞē Individualno delo -
ƌĂēƵŶŽǀ ŵŶŽǎĞŶũĂ ;džϭϬ͕ džϭ ϬϬ͕ džϭϬϬϬͿ ŝŶ ĚĞůũĞŶũĂ͘ hēĞŶĐŝ ŶĂũƉƌĞũ ĚĞůĂũŽ skupinsko delo - delo
indivŝĚƵĂůŶŽ͕ŶĂƚŽƉĂƐǀŽũĞĚĞůŽƉƌŝŵĞƌũĂũŽnjǀƌƐƚŶŝŬŝŝŶǀƐŬƵƉŝŶŝ͘hēŝƚĞůũƐĞƉƌĞŵŝŬĂ s celim razredom
po razredu, spremlja njihovo delo in jim nudi podporo.
5(ã,(1$ÿ%(,1=$'(1,92=291,&2 >ŝƐƚĞŬnjĂnjĂēĞƚŶŽ
ÿH VL æHOLä ]DJRWRYLWL YR]RYQLFR ]D VYRMH QDVOHGQMH ugotavljanje znanja
ŶũŝŵƵēŝƚĞůũƉƌĞǀĞƌŝ
PDWHPDWLĀQo SRWRYDQMHPRUDä UHäLWLQDVOHGQMHUDĀXQH. predhodno znanje
ƵēĞŶĐĞǀŝŶũŝŵ
[ ««« 420: «« ŽŵŽŐŽēŝ͕ĚĂƐĞ
spomnijo, kaj znajo.
5x «« 350: ««
hēŶĂƉŽŵĂŐĂůĂ͗
RAZISKOVANJE: POMNITE! zvezek, kocke, bralno
znamenje
ďĞƐĞĚĂŵŝ͕ƌŝƐďŽĂůŝƐŝŵďŽůŝƉƌŝŬĂǎŝ͕ŬĂŬŽĚĞůŝƓ Ubeseditev misli
ϯϵϲрϯс Individualno/skupinsk
o delo sodelovanje
hēĞŶĐŝ ƉŽũĂƐŶŝũŽ͕ ŶĂ ŬĂŬƓĞŶ ŶĂēŝŶ ďŽĚŽ ĚĞůŝůŝ vsega razreda
ϯϵϲрϯс͘͘͘͘͘͘͘sƐĂŬƵēĞŶĞĐůĂŚŬŽƵƉŽƌĂďŝďŽĚŝƐŝ 3X6=18
svoj zvezek ali/in kocke in/ali svoje bralno
ϭϴрϯсϲ
znamenje (itd.).
ϭϴрϲсϯ
6X16 = 6 X (10+6)
= (6X10)+(6x6)
= 60 + 36
= 96 Sidrna aktivnost
KŵŽŐŽēĂƵēĞŶĐĞŵ͕
da delajo glede na
^ƉŽƐŽďŶĞũƓĞƵēĞŶĐĞƐƉŽĚďƵĚŝ͕ŶĂũŽƐƚĂůŝŵǀƌĂnjƌĞĚƵƉŽũĂƐŶŝũŽ͕ŬĂŬŽŶĂũ lastne potrebe,
ŶĂĚĂůũƵũĞũŽnjƌĞƓĞǀĂŶũĞŵƉƌŽďůĞŵĂ͕ǀĂĚŝũŽŵĞƚĂŬŽŐŶŝƚŝǀŶĞƐƉƌĞƚŶŽƐƚŝǀƐĞŽĚ medtem ko se drugi
njĂēĞƚŬĂƵēŶĞƵƌĞ͘ ƵēĞŶĐŝƵŬǀĂƌũĂũŽnj
ƌĞƓĞǀĂŶũĞƵēŶŝŚŶĂůŽŐ
204
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:53 205
KƚƌŽĐŝ͕ŬŝŚŝƚƌŽƌĞƓŝũŽƉƌŽďůĞŵ͕ůĂŚŬŽ͗
- WŽƐŬƵƐŝũŽŶĂũƚŝĚƌƵŐĞŶĂēŝŶĞnjĂƌĞƓŝƚǀĞdeljenja
- WƌŝŵĞƌũĂũŽŵĞƚŽĚĞ͕ŬŝƐŽũŝŚƵƉŽƌĂďŝůŝ͕ŝŶƐĞŽĚůŽēŝũŽ͕ŬĂƚĞƌĂũĞŶĂũďŽůũƓĂ͕ƚĞƌ
pojasnijo, zakaj.
- EĂƉŝƓĞũŽŝŶƐŬƵƉŝŶŝƉŽũĂƐŶŝũŽŵĞƚŽĚŽ͕ŬŝƐŽũŽƵƉŽƌĂďŝůŝ͘
hēŝƚĞůũŶƵĚŝƉŽŵŽēƚŝƐƚŝŵ͕ŬŝũŽƉŽƚƌĞďƵũĞũŽ͘ Personalizirana
ƵēŝƚĞůũĞǀĂƉŽĚƉŽƌĂ
Otroci delajo aktivnost 1 na str. 109 in rĂnjŵŝƓůũĂũŽŽƚĞŵ͕ŶĂŬĂŬƓĞŶŶĂēŝŶƐƚĂ
^ƚĞƉŚĂŶŽƐŝŶ>ŽƵŬŝĞƌĞƓŝůĂƌĂēƵŶĚĞůũĞŶũĂϯϲϯрϯсǀ;ŽĚŝƚĞƉŽnjŽƌŶŝŶĂ sŬůũƵēŝŵŽƵēĞŶĐĞ
ŵŽǎŶŽƐƚ͕ĚĂƵēĞŶĐŝŵŽƌĚĂŶĞďŽĚŽƌĂnjƵŵĞůŝ͕ĚĂŵŽƌĂŵŽnjĂēĞƚŝnjůĞǀĞƉƌŽƚŝ individualno, odvisno
desni). od njihovih
sposobnosti in
delovnega tempa.
Asinhrono delo
hēĞŶĐŝ ĚĞůĂũŽ ǀ
svojem tempu, ne da
bi jim bilo treba togo
slediti glavnemu
ƚĞŵƉƵ͕ Ŭŝ ŐĂ ĚŽůŽēĂ
ƵēŝƚĞůũ͘
KƚƌŽĐŝŶĂũŶĂƚŽĚĞůĂũŽnjĚŝĨĞƌĞŶĐŝƌĂŶŽƌĂnjůŝēŝĐŽƉƌĞũƓŶũĞĂŬƚŝǀŶŽƐƚŝ͕ŬũĞƌƐĞ
ĚĞƐĞƚŝĐŶĞĚĂŶĂƚĂŶēŶŽƌĂnjĚĞůŝƚŝ͘EƉƌ͘ϰϭϮрϯс͘WŽŵĞŵďŶŽũĞ͕ĚĂƉŽũĂƐŶŝũŽƐǀŽũĞ
ŵŝƐĞůŶĞƉƌŽĐĞƐĞ;ŶŽǀŽnjŶĂŶũĞͿ͘WŽƚĞŵŬŽƐŽŝŶĚŝǀŝĚƵĂůŶŽŝnjƌĂēƵŶĂůŝŬŽůŝēŶŝŬ͕
preverijo svoj odgovor pri sosedu v klopi in pojasnijo svoj miselni proces. Na
ƌĂnjůŝēŶŝŚƐƚŽƉŶũĂŚůĂŚŬŽĚĞůĂũŽƐƉŽŵŽēũŽƐƉŽĚŶũĞƉŽǀĞnjĂǀĞ͗ hƉŽƌĂďĂ/<dnjĂǀĞēũŽ
ŵŽƚŝǀĂĐŝũŽƵēĞŶĐĞǀnjĂ
1.Deljenje z uporabo kock Dienes: https://www-k6.thinkcentral.com/content/hsp delo
/math/hspmath/na/common/itools_int_9780547584997_/basetenblocks.html
2.Deljenje njnjĂŽŬƌŽǎĞǀĂŶũĞŵƌĞnjƵůƚĂƚĂin z uporabo algoritma
3.Deljenje z uporabo algoritma:https://www.matific.com/us/en-us/ Sidrna aktivnost
KŵŽŐŽēĂƵēĞŶĐĞŵ
^ƉŽƐŽďŶĞũƓŝŽƚƌŽĐŝůĂŚŬŽŶĂĚĂůũƵũĞũŽnjĂŬƚŝǀŶŽƐƚŵĂϮΘϯ͘hēŝƚĞůũũŝŵƉƌǀŝē delo glede na njihove
predstavi podroben algoritem deljenja (p. 110). Izvedejo analizo delitelja (npr. potrebe, medtem ko
ƉƌŝϰϴϰрϰсǀƵƉŽƓƚĞǀĂũŽ͕ĚĂũĞϰϬϬрϰсϭϬϬ͕ϴϬрϰсϮϬ͕ϰрϰсϭ͕ƚŽƌĞũũĞ ĚƌƵŐŝƵēĞŶĐŝ
100 + 20 + 1 = 121). izpolnjujejo redno
delo pri pouku.
205
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:53 206
ɈƌĂŶƐĨŽƌŵĂƚŝǀŶĞĂŬƚŝǀŶŽƐƚŝͬZĂnjƓŝƌũĞŶĞĂŬƚŝǀŶŽƐƚŝͬKďŽŐĂƚŝƚǀĞŶĞĂŬƚŝǀŶŽƐƚŝ͕ŬŝũŝŚ
lahko ƵƉŽƌĂďŝŵŽ͕ēĞũĞēĂƐĂůŝŬŽƚĚŽŵĂēŽŶĂůŽŐŽ͘
Z asinhronim delom
x ^ĂŵŝŶĂƉŝƓĞũŽŝŶƌĞƓŝũŽŶĞŬĂũƌĂēƵŶŽǀĂůŝďĞƐĞĚŝůŶŝŚŶĂůŽŐĚĞůũĞŶũĂ͘ ůĂŚŬŽ Ɖƌŝ ƚĞũ ƵēŶŝ Ƶƌŝ
ƵēĞŶĐĞŵ ŽŵŽŐŽēŝŵŽ
x ZĂēƵŶĂũŽʹ ĚĞůŝũŽŶĂƉĂŵĞƚ;ƚƌŝŵĞƐƚŶĂƓƚĞǀŝůĂĚĞůŝũŽnjĞŶŽŵĞƐƚŶŝŵŝ͕ƚĂŬŽĚĂ
ĚŽĚĂƚĞŶ ēĂƐ njĂ ĚĞůŽ
na pamet analizirajo delitelja).
pri transformativnih
x ZĞƓƵũĞũŽƉƌŽďůĞŵͬďĞƐĞĚŝůŶĞŶĂůŽŐe z uporabo novega znanja
aktivnostih
ͬZĂnjƓŝƌũĞŶŝŚ
aktivnostih
/Obogatitvenih
aktivnostih
206
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:53 207
Razred: 8
Trajanje: 45 min
Predmet: KEMIJA
Učna tema: PERIODNI SISTEM ELEMENTOV (KOVINE/NEKOVINE)
Oblika dela: FRONTALNA, INDIVIDUALNA, V DVOJICAH, SKUPINSKA
Pripomočki: UČBENIK, UČNI LISTI- ZNAČILNOSTI ELEMENTOV, PERIODNI SISTEM ELEMEN-
TOV, TRI SKUPINE (TRI BARVE) KATRONČKOV Z ENAČBAMI RAZLIČNIH TEŽAVNOSTI
Učni cilj:
Učenci:
• utrdijo učne vsebine o kemijskih elementih (zgradbi in položaju atoma v periodnem
sistemu elementov) in urejevanju kemijskih enačb;
• spoznajo razvrščanje elementov med kovine, nekovine in polkovine;
• spoznajo skupine kovin in nekovin (elemente, ki sodijo v posamezne skupine);
• se seznanijo z osnovnimi značilnostmi kovin in nekovin.
Potrebno predznanje
Učenci naj bi že:
• poznali kemijske elemente in njihove simbole
• se orientirali v periodnem sistemu (uporaba le tega);
• poznali zgradbo atoma in periodnega sistema elementov.
Cilji, ki naj bi jih učenci v učni uri osvojili (osnovno znanje in veščine)
Učenec:
• utrdi zgradbo atomov in urejevanje kemijskih enačb;
• spozna skupine kovin in nekovin (elemente, ki sodijo v te skupine);
• spozna lastnosti kovin in nekovin.
Nadgradnja/ poglabljanje znanja in veščin (transformacija znanja in veščin)
Učenec razvije:
• samostojno iskanje vseh podatkov o zgradbi atoma;
• urejevanje težjih primerov kemijskih enačb;
• pregleden slikovni zapis lastnosti kovin in nekovin (pretvorba iz besedila v sliko);
• samostojno razvrščanje elementov v posamezne skupine kovin in nekovin.
207
5_SLOVENE_SELIDOSH: 1 27/4/17 14:53 208
ŝŶĂŵŝēŶĂ ŝŐƌĂ njĂ ƵƚƌũĞǀĂŶũĞ njŐƌĂĚďĞ ĂƚŽŵĂ ͞ƉŽŝƓēŝ ůŝƐƚ ŝŶ ŚŝƚƌŽ
EƉƌ͗͘DŝƐĞůŶŝƉƌŝƉŽŵŽēŬŝ
(podpora): periodni sistem
ĞůĞŵĞŶƚŽǀ͕ŬĂƌƚŽŶēŬŝnj
razlago snovi
KƐŶŽǀŶĞ njŶĂēŝůŶŽƐƚŝ ŬŽǀŝŶ ŝŶ ŶĞŬŽǀŝŶ- ƵēĞŶĐŝ ŝŶĚŝǀŝĚƵĂůŶŽ ǀ individualen znakovni zapis
zvezek besedne podatke pretvorijo v znakovni zapis (s slikami (po potrebi tudi z
predstavijo asociacije te besede). ďĞƐĞĚĂŵŝͿnjĂƵēĞŶĐĞϭ͘
nivoja
Ponavljanje/ pregled osvojenega znanja
WŽŶŽǀŝƚĞǀ njŶĂēŝůŶŽƐƚŝ ŬŽǀŝŶ ŝŶ ŶĞŬŽǀŝŶ ŶĂ ŬŽŶŬƌĞƚŶŝŚ ĞůĞŵĞŶƚŝŚ hēŝƚĞůũƐůĞĚŝŬĂƚĞƌŝƵēĞŶĐŝ
;<ĂŬƓŶŽ ũĞ ƚĂůŝƓēĞ ǎĞůĞnjĂ͍ ůĂƐƚŶŽƐƚ ŬŽǀŝŶ͕ <ĂŬƓŶĂ ũĞ ĞůĞŬƚƌŝēŶĂ so si pomagali pri
prevodnost natrija? lastnost nekovin) . ŽĚŐŽǀŽƌŝŚŝŶnjĂƉƵƓēĂŶũƵ
ZĂnjƌĞĚ njĂƉƵƓēĂũŽƵēĞŶĐŝ ŐůĞĚĞ ŶĂ ƉŽƐĂŵĞnjŶŽ ƐŬƵƉŝŶŽ ŬŽǀŝŶŽnj͘ ƵēŝůŶŝĐĞnjnjĂƉŝƐŽŵǀnjǀĞnjŬƵ
nekovin, v katero so se razvrstili med obravnavo snovi (halogeni ali na table - ena od oblik
ĞůĞŵĞŶƚŝ͕ƉƌĞŚŽĚŶŝĞůĞŵĞŶƚŝ͕͙Ϳ ͞ĞdžŝƚƐůŝƉ͟
208
View publication stats